Table of Contents
General 1
Introduction to MOBY F 2
Configuration and Mounting
Guidelines 3
Mobile Data Memories 4
Read/Write Devices
Read/Write Antennas 5
Interfaces 6
Accessories 7
Documentation A
Error Messages B
ASCII Table C
Published in November 2006
6GT2 497-4BA00-0EA2
Configuration,
Installation and Service
Manual
MOBYR F
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as
well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the
manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
!Danger
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper
precautions are not taken.
!Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.
!Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not
taken.
Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Note
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or
to a particular part of the documentation.
The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual.
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified
persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits,
equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Note the following:
!Warning
This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or
the technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other
manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
MOBYR, SIMATICR and SINECR are trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Some of the other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the
owner’s rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes.
We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement
with the hardware and software described. Since deviations
cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agree-
ment. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly
and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions.
Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.
E Siemens AG 1998, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2005, 2006
Technical data subject to change.
Disclaimer of LiabilityCopyright E Siemens AG 1998 All rights reserved
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
contents is not permitted without express written authority.
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design,
are reserved.
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Special Products, Projects Automotive Industry, Training
P.O. Box 4848, D-90327 Nuernberg
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No. 6GT2 497-4BA00-0EA2
Safety Guidelines
Qualified Personnel
Correct Usage
Trademarks
i
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table of Contents
1 General 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Introduction to MOBY F 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Basic Requirements 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 Transmission Window 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 Transmit Period of the MDS 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS F4xx 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.4 Communication between ASM and User Program 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.5 Sample Calculation 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Field Data of MDS and SLG/SLA/SIM 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Relationship of Speed to Amount of Data 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Installation Guidelines 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Metal-Free Space 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Effects on the Transmission Window 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Reduction of Metallic Effects 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.4 Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Memories 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 EMC Guidelines 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Foreword 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 General 3-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Spreading of Interference 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.4 The FFT Command 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.5 Cabinet Layout 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.6 Avoiding Interference Sources 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.7 Equipotential Bonding 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.8 Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.9 Shielding the Cables 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.10 Basic Rules on EMC 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 Concept of MOBY Shielding 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Cable and Plug Connector Allocation 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1 Cable Configuration 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2 Plug Connector Allocations 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.3 Connection Cables 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.4 Cable length 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Mobile Data Memories 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Introduction 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 MDS F124 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 MDS F125 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 MDS F160 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 MDS F415 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
5 Read/Write Devices
Read/Write Antennas 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Introduction 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 SLG 80 ANT F5 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 SLG 82 Basic Device 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 SLG 82 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 SLA 81 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 SLA 82 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Interfaces 6-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Introduction 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 ASM 400 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1 Overview 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2 Hardware Description 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.3 SIMATIC S5 Configuration 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 ASM 410 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 ASM 450/452 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 ASM 470/475 6-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 ASM 473 6-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 ASM 824/850/854 6-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8 Serial Interface Module – SIM 6-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.1 Overview 6-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.2 Cable and Plug Connector Allocation 6-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.3 Programming the SIM Module 6-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.4 SIM 80 ANT F5 6-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.5 SIM 82 6-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 Accessories 7-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 MOBY Software 7-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 MOBY Wide Range Power Pack 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 MOBY Hand-Held Terminal STG F 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Documentation A-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Error Messages B-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.1 General Errors B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2 ASM-Related Errors B-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.1 ASM 400 with FB 250 B-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.2 ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47 B-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2.3 ASM 450 with FB 240 B-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C ASCII Table C-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
iii
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Figures
2-1 Overview of MOBY F components 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 Transmission window 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Direction of movement of the MDS 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Working in static operation 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Working in dynamical operation 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 SLG 80 ANT F5 with MDS F415 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 SLA 81 with MDS F415 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 SLA 82 with MDS F415 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 Isolated mounting of ANT F5 on metal 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11 SLA 81 mounted in metal 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12 Flush mounting in metal: SLA 82 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13 MDS in metal-free environment 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14 MDS in metallic environment 3-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15 Interfering metal support 3-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16 Flush installation 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17 Spreading of interference 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18 The four kinds of interference coupling 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-19 Shielding via housing 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20 Avoidance of interference via optimal layout 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21 Filtering the supply voltage 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22 Inductive interference 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23 Equipotential bonding 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24 Circuit diagram of the principle of grounding fault monitoring 3-41. . . . . . . . . .
3-25 SIMATIC PLC 100U with ASM 410 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-26 Shielding of the cables 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-27 Connection of the shield rail 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-28 Interruption of shielded cables 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-29 Simple layout with ASM 400 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-30 Layout of the ASM 470 with shield connecting element 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-31 Baring of the cable shield 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-32 Connection cable: ASM 400 ↔ SLG 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-33 Connection cable: ASM 410 ↔ SLG 3-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-34 Connection cable: ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-35 Connection cable: ASM 470/475 ↔ SLG 3-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-36 Connection cable: PC ↔ SIM 80 ANT F5 (not for SIM 82) 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . .
3-37 Connecting cable RS 232 PC ↔ SLG 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-38 Connection cable, RS 232 PC ↔ SIM 82/ASM 824 3-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-39 Connection cable, SLG/SIM 82; ASM 824/850/854 ↔ SLA 81/SLA 82 3-56. .
3-40 Extension cable, SLG/SIM 82; ASM 824/850/854 ↔ SLA 81/SLA 82 3-57. . .
3-41 24 V DC stub line SLG/SIM/ASM ↔ MOBY wide-range power pack 3-57. . . .
4-1 MDS F124 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Dimensions of the MDS F124 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Metal-free space for the MDS F124 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 MDS F125 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Dimensions of the MDS F125 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Metal-free space for the MDS F125 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 MDS F160 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 Dimensions of the MDS F160 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 Metal-free space for the MDS F160 4-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
iv MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
4-10 MDS F415 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Dimensions of the MDS F415 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12 Metal-free space for the MDS F415 4-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1 Read/write device SLG 80 ANT F5 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Transmission window of the SLG 80 ANT F5 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Metal-free space for SLG 80 ANT F5 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Distance D for SLG 80 ANT F5 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Dimensional diagram of SLG 80 ANT F5 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Dimensional drawing of the spacer kit for MOBY F ANT F5 5-9. . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 Installation drawing for spacer kit 5-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 Read/write, SLG 82 basic device 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9 Serial interface of the SLG 82 basic device to the SLA 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10 Serial interfaces of the SLG 82 basic device to the user 5-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11 Dimensional drawing of SLG 82 basic device without mounting holes 5-14. . .
5-12 Mounting drawing of the adapter floor plate 5-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13 Read/write device SLG 82 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14 Transmission window of SLG 82 with SLA 81 5-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15 Metal-free space for SLG 82 with SLA 81 5-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16 Distance D: SLG 82 5-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-17 Serial interface of SLG 82 to SLA 81 5-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-18 Serial interface of SLG 82 to user 5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-19 Drawing of SLG 82’s housing 5-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-20 Drawing of antenna for SLG 82 (SLA 81) 5-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21 Drawing of mounting of adapter floor plate 5-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-22 Read/write device SLA 81 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23 Transmission window of SLA 81 5-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-24 Metal-free space for SLA 81 5-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-25 Distance D: SLA 81 5-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26 Dimensional drawing of SLA 81 5-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-27 Dimensional drawing of the mounting clamp 5-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-28 Drawing of mounting of SLA 81 with mounting clamp 5-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-29 SLA 82 read/write antenna 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-30 Transmission window of the SLA 82 5-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-31 Metal-free area of SLA 82 5-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-32 Distance D: SLA 82 5-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-33 Dimensional drawing of SLA 82 5-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1 Configurator of ASM 400 6-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Plug connectors and their assignment for ASM 400 6-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Switches and plug-in jumpers for ASM 400 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Settings on the channel module 6-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 CR 700-0LA module rack (S5-115U) 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 CR 700-0LB module rack (S5-115U) 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 CR 700-1 module rack (S5-115U) 6-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8 CR 700-2 module rack (S5-115U) 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 CR 700-3 module rack (S5-115U) 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 ER 701-3 module rack (S5-115U) 6-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11 S5-135U/-155U central controller 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12 S5-155U/-155H central controller 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13 EG S5-183U expansion device for S5-135U/-155U 6-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14 EG S5-184U expansion device for S5-135U/155U 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15 EG S5-185U expansion device for S5-135U/155U/155H 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16 EG S5-187U expansion device for S5-135U/155U 6-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17 Configurator for ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5 6-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
v
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6-18 Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U 6-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19 ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements 6-20. . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20 Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410 6-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21 ASM 450/452 interface 6-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22 Configurator of ASM 450/452 6-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23 Connection plug, ASM 450/452 ↔ SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00) 6-29. . . . . . . . . . .
6-24 Connection cable, ASM 450/452 ↔ SLG (6GT2 491-1C...) 6-29. . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25 PROFIBUS cable with 24 V power 6-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26 SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452 6-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-27 Dimensional drawing of the ASM 450/452 6-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-28 Pin allocation and LEDs of ASM 450/452 6-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-29 Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable 6-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-30 Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the
terminating resistance 6-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-31 ASM 470/475 interface 6-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-32 Configurator for ASM 470/475 6-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33 Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475 6-41. . . . . . . . . . .
6-34 Wiring of ASM 470/475 to SLG (6GT2 091-0E...) 6-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35 Baring of the cable shield when customer makes own cable 6-43. . . . . . . . . . .
6-36 ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog 6-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-37 ASM 473 interface 6-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-38 Configurator for an ASM 473 6-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39 Maximum configuration of ASM 473 on an ET 200X 6-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-40 Pin asssignment and LEDs of ASM 473 6-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-41 Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules. 6-53. . . . . .
6-42 ASM 824/850/854 interface module 6-54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-43 Configurator for ASM 824, ASM 850 (only with 1 x SLA 8x)
and ASM 854 6-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-44 Serial interfaces of the ASM 824/850/854 to SLA 81 6-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-45 Serial interface of ASM 824/850/854 to user 6-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46 Drawing of ASM 824/850/854 with mounting holes 6-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-47 Drawing of adapter floor plate 6-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-48 Example of a configuration for SIM 6-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-49 Configuration byte 0 6-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-50 Configuration byte 1 6-65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-51 Standard cabling for computer/SIM 80 ANT F5, RS 232 6-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-52 Standard cabling for computer/SIM 82, RS 232 6-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53 Standard cabling for computer/SIM 82, RS 422 6-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54 DI/DO cabling with voltage supply for SIM 80 ANT F5 6-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55 SIM 80 ANT F5 serial interface module 6-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-56 Transmission window of the SIM 80 ANT F5 6-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-57 Metal-free space for SIM 80 ANT F5 6-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-58 Distance D for SIM 80 ANT F5 6-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-59 Dimensional diagram of SIM 80 ANT F5 6-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-60 Serial interface module SIM 82 6-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-61 Transmission window of SIM 82 6-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-62 Metal-free space for SIM 82 6-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-63 Distance D: SIM 82 6-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-64 Serial interface of SIM 82 to SLA 81 6-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-65 Serial interface of SIM 82 to user 6-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-66 Dimensional drawing of the SIM 82 housing 6-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-67 Dimensional drawing of antenna for SIM 82 (SLA 81) 6-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-68 Drawing of mounting of adapter floor plate 6-89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
vi MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
7-1 MOBY wide range power pack 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Plug connector allocation of 24 V output 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Dimensions of the MOBY wide range power pack 7-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 MOBY STG F hand-held terminal 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 Hardware of the STG F 7-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
vii
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Tables
2-1 Technical data of MOBY F 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1 Constant time K and tByte 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Transmission time of ID number MDS F1xx/MDS F4xx,
starting at address 0 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Maximum transversal speed for reading the ID number 3-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Field data of all MDSs and SLGs/SLAs/SIMs
(ANT F5 with 100-mm distance to metal) 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS 3-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS 4xx (r/w) 3-12. . . . . . .
3-7 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS 1xx (r/o) 3-13. . . . . . . .
3-8 Reduction of field data in %:
MDS and SLG/SIM with ANT F5 (See figures 3-13/3-14.) 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Reduction of the field data by mounting in metal (in %):
MDS and SLG 82/SIM 82/SLA 81 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 Reduction of the field data by mounting in metal (in %):
MDS with SLA 82 3-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11 Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced
epoxy resin (MDS F124/F125/F415) 3-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-12 Interference sources: Origin and effects 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-13 Causes of coupling paths 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-14 Parameterization of the MOBY F operating modes for the
FFT command 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-15 Voltage supply of the SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 and SLG/SIM 82 3-48. . . . . . . . . .
3-16 Maximum ripple of the supply voltage for SLG/SIM 80 (based on
frequency range) 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-17 Plug connector allocation of the SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5/SLG 82
plug connector (pin housing side) 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-18 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D (socket housing side) 3-50.
3-19 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D
(socket housing side) 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-20 Plug connector allocation of SLA plug connector
(pin housing side) 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-21 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D
(socket housing side) 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-22 Ordering data for counterplug IP65 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-23 Plug connector allocation of 4-pole voltage supply plug connector
(pin housing side) 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-24 Ordering data for voltage supply plug 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-25 Ordering data for MOBY cables 3-58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1 Overview of the MDS 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS 4-3. . . . . . . .
4-3 Ordering data for MDS F124 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 Technical data of MDS F124 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Field data of MDS F124 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-6 Ordering data for MDS F125 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-7 Technical data of MDS F125 4-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-8 Field data of MDS F125 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-9 Ordering data for MDS F160 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 Technical data for MDS F160 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-11 Field data for MDS F160 4-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-12 Ordering data for MDS F415 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
viii MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
4-13 Technical data of MDS F415 4-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14 Memory organization of the MDS F4xx 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-15 Field data of MDS F415 4-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1 Overview table, SLG/SLA 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Ordering data for the SLG 80 ANT F5 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Technical data of SLG 80 ANT F5 5-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Field data of SLG 80 ANT F5 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Ordering data for spacer kit MOBY F ANT F5 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 Ordering data for the SLG 82 basic device 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 Technical data of the SLG 82 basic device 5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 Ordering data of the SLG 82 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-9 Technical data of the SLG 82 5-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-10 Field data of SLG 82 5-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-11 Ordering data of the SLA 81 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-12 Technical data of the SLA 81 5-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13 Field data of SLA 81 5-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-14 Ordering data of the SLA 82 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-15 Technical data of the SLA 82 5-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16 Field data of the SLA 82 5-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1 Overview of the interfaces 6-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Ordering data of ASM 400 6-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Technical data of ASM 400 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252 6-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-5 Ordering data of ASM 410 6-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-6 Technical data of ASM 410 6-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-7 Status and error LEDs of ASM 410 6-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-8 Operating modes for ASM 410 6-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-9 Ordering data for ASM 450/452 6-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-10 Technical data of ASM 450/452 6-26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-11 LEDs for PROFIBUS diagnostics 6-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-12 Ordering data for ASM 470/475 6-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-13 Technical data of ASM 470/475 6-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-14 Function of the LEDs on ASM 470/475 6-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-15 Additional LEDs on the ASM 475 6-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-16 Ordering data of ASM 473 6-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17 Technical data of ASM 473 6-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-18 Prerequsites for operation of the ASM 473 6-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-19 Ordering data of the ASM 824/850/854 6-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-20 Technical data of the ASM 824/850/854 6-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-21 Memory organization for SIM 80 ANT F5 with MDS F4xx 6-62. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-22 Memory organization for SIM 82 with MDS F4xx 6-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-23 Configuration of the delivered MDS F4xx transponders 6-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-24 Field data of all MDSs and SIMs without effects of metal 6-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS 6-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS F4xx (r/w) 6-68. . . . . .
6-27 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS F1xx (r/o) 6-68. . . . . .
6-28 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D (pin housing side) 6-68. . . .
6-29 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D (socket housing side) 6-69.
6-30 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D
(socket housing side) 6-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-31 Plug connector allocation of SLA plug connector (pin housing side) 6-70. . . .
6-32 Plug connector allocation of 4-pole voltage supply plug connector
(pin housing side) 6-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
ix
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6-33 Voltage supply of the SIM 6-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-34 Max. ripple of the supply voltage for SIM 80 ANT F5
(based on frequency range) 6-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-35 Ordering data for the SIM 80 ANT F5 6-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-36 Technical data of SIM 80 ANT F5 6-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-37 Field data of SIM 80 ANT F5 6-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-38 Ordering data for SIM 82 6-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39 Technical data of SIM 82 6-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-40 Field data of SIM 82 6-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1 Ordering data for MOBY software 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Ordering data for MOBY wide range power pack 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Technical data of MOBY wide range power pack 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Ordering data of STG F 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 Technical data for STG F hand-held terminal 7-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1 General errors B-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-2 Error messags of FB 250 B-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47 B-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-4 Error messages of FB 240 B-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
xMOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table of Contents
1-1
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
General
This configuration, installation and service manual will help you to plan and
configure your MOBY F system. It covers the guidelines on configuration
and installation and provides complete technical data on the individual com-
ponents.
The specialists of Technical Support are ready to advise and support you
when you have questions on the functions and handling of our MOBY pro-
ducts.
You can reach us around the clock anywhere in the world.
Telephone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223
E-mail: adsupport@siemens.com
General news on MOBY F or an overview of our other identification systems
are available on the Internet under the following address.
http://www.siemens.de/moby
Technical support
Internet
1
1-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
General
2-1
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Introduction to MOBY F
MOBY F is an RF identification system for optimization of material flow
primarily in the sectors of storage, commissioning and logistics. This family
of products includes powerful read/write devices (SLGs) which, together with
mobile data memories (MDSs), permit wide read/write distances. The MDSs
are available in both fixed-code and write-access EEPROM memories.
As with all MOBY systems, the user-friendly link to the SIMATIC is pro-
vided by interface modules (ASMs). So-called serial interface modules
(SIMs) are available for links to PCs, EDP systems and controllers other than
SIMATIC. These modules are actually SLGs equipped with communications
intelligence to which a documented communications protocol has been added
to ensure a high degree of flexibility.
MOBY F is primarily used when product, packaging and parts identification
must be inductive (i.e., without contact), reliable and fast. Long read/write
distances combined with the selection of the MDS model ensure a high de-
gree of flexibility in the following fields.
SStorage technology/commissioning
SLogistics and distribution
SMaterial flow control
SParts identification
Table 2-1 Technical data of MOBY F
Storage capacity
MDS F4xx
MDS F1xx
Depending on type:
256-byte EEPROM1
40-bit fixed-code
Data organization Address-oriented
Protection rating IP65 to IP67
Operating temperature –25° to +100°C
Data transmission speed (SLG - MDS) w 6 msec/byte read-accesses
w 10 msec/byte write-accesses
Read/write distance 0 to 420 mm
Can be connected to SIMATIC S5/S7, PCs, EDP systems, PLCs
of other manufacturers, and PROFIBUS
1 192-byte EEPROM can be used with SLG. 224-byte EEPROM can be used with SIM.
Principal applica-
tion areas
Technical data of
MOBY F
2
2-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
SMDS: (mobile data memory)
SSLA: (read and write antenna)
SSLG: (read/write device)
SSIM: (serial interface module)
SASM: (interface module)
SSTG F: (service and test device)
SLG 80 with ANT F5
MDS F124 (r/o)
Button
SIEMENS
MOBY F
Disc
SIM 80 with ANT F5
MDS F415 (r/w)
MOBY F
SIEMENS
MDS F125 (r/o)
Disc
SLG 82 SLA 81
SLG 82
MOBY F
SIEMENS
MDS F160 (r/o)
Button
SIEMENS
MOBY F
SIM 82
SLA 82
RS 232RS 422Internal system interface RS 422
Inductive power/data transmission (125 kHz)
ASM 400/
CM 422
for SIMATIC
S115U
S135U
S155U/H
SFB 250
ASM 410
for SIMATIC
S90U
S95U
S100U/H
SET 100/200
SFB 41
ASM 450/452
for
SPROFIBUS DP/
DPV1 connection
with FB/FC for
SIMATIC S5/S7
ASM 470/475
for SIMATIC
SS7-300 with
FC 47/FC 45
SET 200M with
FB 47/FC 47
PC/controller other
than SIMATIC
SIMs operated
directly on the serial
interface of the PC
ASM 850/854
SPROFIBUS DPV1
connection with FC 45
for SIMATIC S7
ASM 824
for connection to
SPC
SExternal controller
SComputer
SINUMERIK via
serial interface
ASM 473
can be installed in
ET 200X;
Control via
PROFIBUS
DPV1 with FC 45
Figure 2-1 Overview of MOBY F components
Overview of
MOBY F
components
Introduction to MOBY F
3-1
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines 3
3-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.1 Basic Requirements
!Warning
Do not make changes to the devices.
Violation will invalidate interference emission certification (BZT, FCC), CE
and the manufacturer’s warranty.
To choose the correct MOBY F components, apply the following criteria to
your particular application:
STransmission distance (i.e., read/write distance)
SThe amount of data to be transferred
SMetal-free spaces for MDS and SLG/SLA (antenna)
SStatic of dynamic transmission of the data
SSpeed for dynamic transmission
STolerances of the tracking
SEnvironmental conditions (e.g., moisture, temperature, chemical effects,
and so on)
SMaximum write frequency per MDS
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-3
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.1.1 Transmission Window
The read/write device (i.e., SLG/SLA) generates an inductive alternating
field. The field is strongest in the vicinity of the SLG and decreases in
strength the further away from the SLG it moves. Distribution of the field
depends on the layout and geometry of the antennas on the SLG/SLA and
the MDS.
MDS functionality requires a minimum field strength on the MDS achieved
at a distance of Sg from the SLG/SLA. The figure below shows the transmis-
sion window between the MDS and the SLG/SLA.
View of side
View of top
Sa: Operating distance between MDS and SLG/SLA
Sg: Limit distance (The limit distance is the maximum clearance between the top of the
SLG and the top of the MDS at which the transmission will still function under nor-
mal conditions.)
L: Length of a transmission window for vertical direction of movement of the MDS
PI: Point of intersection of the symmetry axes of the MDS
MDS
MDS
Transmission
window
ANT F5
PI
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
Sg
Sa
L
L
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
Metal plate (spacing kit)
Figure 3-1 Transmission window
The active field to the MDS is a circle. Cf. view of top. The MDS can be
processed as soon as the point of intersection (IP) of the MDS enters the
circle of the transmission window. Direction of MDS movement and rotation
can be disregarded.
The above figure also shows that operation in the area between Sa and Sg is
possible. The greater the distance, the smaller the active working area be-
comes until it is reduced to one point at distance Sg. For this reason, only
static operation should be used in the area between Sa and Sg.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-4 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The MDS and the SLG do not have a polarization axis (i.e., the MDS can
come from any direction, assume any position and cross the transmission
window). The data of the transmission window do not change. The active
area is shown below.
L
B
or
L
B
ŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
or
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠ
BL
Figure 3-2 Direction of movement of the MDS
When static operation is used, the MDS can be processed into the area of
the limit distance (i.e., Sg). The MDS must be positioned exactly over the
SLG/SLA as shown below.
Transmission
window
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
Sg
MDS
ANT F5
Metal plate (spacing kit)
Figure 3-3 Working in static operation
Direction of move-
ment of the MDS
Working in static
operation
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-5
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
View of top
Transmission
window
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
MDS
ANT F5
MDS
L
Figure 3-4 Working in dynamical operation
The following approximation formula applies to practical applications:
B+0.4 @L
B: Width of the transmission window
L: Length of the transmission window
The width of the transmission window (B) is particularly important for the
tolerance of mechanical tracking. When B is maintained, the formula can be
used without restriction for the transmit period.
Working in
dynamic operation
Width of the trans-
mission window
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-6 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.1.2 Transmit Period of the MDS
The transmit period is the time during which the MDS is located in the trans-
mission window of an SLG/SLA. During this time, the SLG/SLA can ex-
change data with the MDS.
The formula used to calculate the transmit period is shown below.
tV+L@0.8Ă[m]
VMDSĂƪmńsƫ
tV: Transmit period of the MDS
L: Length of the transmission window
VMDS: Speed of the data memory in dynamic operation
0.8: Constant factor. Compensates for temperature influences and pro-
duction tolerances.
During static operation, the transmit period can be any length of time. The
transmit period must last at least as long as necessary to conclude commu-
nication with the MDS.
During dynamic operation, the transmit period is determined by the system
environment. The amount of data to be transferred must be adjusted to the
transmit period or vice versa.
General formula:
tVwtK
tV :Transmit period of the data memory in the field of the SLG/SLA
tK: Communication time between MDS and ASM
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-7
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.1.3 Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS F4xx
Communication between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS is asynchronous with a
transmission speed of 19200 baud.
General formula:
tK+K)tByte @n
Calculation of the maximum amount of user data:
nmax +tV-K
tByte
tK: Communication time between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS
tV: Transmit period
n: Amount of user data in bytes
nmax: Maximum amount of user data in bytes during dynamic operation
tbyte: Transmission time for 1 byte (cf. table 3-1)
K: Constant. The constant represents an internal system time. It con-
tains the time required for power buildup on the MDS and the time
required for command transmission (cf. table 3-1).
Table 3-1 Constant time K and tByte
K [msec] tByte [msec] Operating Mode
180 6 Read MDS ASM with SLG
180 10 Write MDS
180 5 Read MDS ASM with SLA
(ASM 854 824 850)
270 6 Write MDS (ASM 854, 824, 850)
This table applies to all commands. When a user command consists of sev-
eral subcommands, the formula for tK must be applied to each subcommand.
The tK calculation applies to interference-free transmission. When transmis-
sion is briefly interrupted due to external interference, the ASM continues the
command automatically.
Table 3-2 Transmission time of ID number MDS F1xx/MDS F4xx,
starting at address 0
Size ID No. Read ID No. ¢ tK [msec]
MDS F1xx 5 bytes 50 msec
MDS F4xx 4 bytes 60 msec
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-8 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 3-3 Maximum transversal speed for reading the ID number
VMDS with
SIM/SLG 82/SLA 81
VMDS with
SLA 82
VMDS with
SLG/SIM 80 with ANT F5
MDS F124 1.1 m/sec 2 m/sec 4.5 m/sec
MDS F125 1.1 m/sec 2 m/sec 4.5 m/sec
MDS F160 0.9 m/sec 1.6 m/sec 3.7 m/sec
MDS F415 0.9 m/sec 1.6 m/sec 3.7 m/sec
3.1.4 Communication between ASM and User Program
The time required for communication between ASM and user depends on the
following factors.
SCycle time and type of programmable controller
SSoftware used (FB 41, FB 47, FC 47, FB 240, FC 44, FC 45, FB 250)
Communication between the ASM 400 and the user can be divided into three
steps.
a) The user issues a command and starts it. When the FB is called the next
time, the command is transferred to the ASM and is acknowledged by the
ASM.
b) The ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user or the FBs are
in wait status. Data communication with the MDS starts as soon as an
MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG/SLA. The MDS data
are stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness.
c) Communication of the ASM with the MDS has been concluded. When
the FB is called the next time, the read data or the results of a write com-
mand are transferred from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finis-
hed message.
See applicable documentation for the exact communication times be-
tween ASM and user.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-9
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.1.5 Sample Calculation
A conveyor system moves the pallets with the MDS at a maximum speed of
VMDS = 1 m/sec. The following MOBY F components were selected.
SASM 400 (with FB 250)
SSLG 80 ANT F5
SMDS F415
Task:
a) Physical specifications are to be provided to the constructor of the plant.
b) The maximum number of bytes in dynamic operation is to be provided to
the programmer.
For technical data of the components, see the tables in chapter 3.2 (“field
data of MDS and SLG/SLA/SIM”).
H
Direction of movement
0 < H < Sa
(View of side)
0 < H < 300 mm
MDS
ŠŠ
ŠŠ
ŠŠ
ŠŠ
ŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠ
Š
ŠŠ
ŠŠ
ŠŠ
Š
ŠŠ
ŠŠ
ŠŠ
Š
ŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠ
Š
ŠŠ
ŠŠ
ŠŠ
Š
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
ŠŠŠŠŠŠ
Pallet
Castor conveyor
ANT F5
Figure 3-5 Tolerances of the side allowance of the pallet
The customer
application
Tolerance of the
height allowance
of the pallet
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-10 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
B = Width of transmission window in
dynamical operation
Middle line of the MDS and SLG
Tolerance range of the side allowance
Direction of movement of the MDS
ANT F5
B
MDS
Figure 3-6 Tolerance of the side allowance of the pallet
See table 3-6 for this value.
See table 3-5 for this value.
tv+L*0.8
VMDS +0.28Ăm*0.8
1Ămńsec +0.224Ă sec +224Ămsec
For normal operating mode, see table 3-1 for the values of K and tbyte.
Calculation of nmax
Read:
tv *K
tByte +224Ămsec *180Ămsec
6Ămsec +7.33 ånmax +7Ăbytes
Write:
tv *K
tByte +224Ămsec *180Ămsec
10Ămsec +4.40 ånmax +4Ăbytes
Up to 11 bytes can be read or 4 bytes can be written when the MDS passes
by.
Tolerances of the
side allowance of
the pallet
Minimum distance
between antennas
Minimum distance
between MDS and
MDS
Maximum number
of bytes
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-11
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.2 Field Data of MDS and SLG/SLA/SIM
The following table shows the field data of all MOBY F MDS and SLG/SLA/
SIM components. This information makes it particularly easy to select an
MDS and an SLG/SLA/SIM.
All technical data are typical data and are valid for an ambient room temper-
ature of 0° to +50° C, and a voltage supply of 22 V to 27 V DC. Tolerances
of ± 20% are permitted due to manufacturing and temperature factors.
Additional tolerances apply to the field data when the total voltage range of
20 V to 30 V DC is utilized on the SLG/SLA/SIM and/or the total tempera-
ture range is utilized on the MDS and SLG/SLA/SIM.
Note
To ensure optimal field data even in metallic surroundings, the ANT F5 is
calibrated at the plant to a distance of 100 mm to metal.
Table 3-4 Field data of all MDSs and SLGs/SLAs/SIMs
(ANT F5 with 100-mm distance to metal)
MDS
SLG/SIM
MDS F124 MDS F125 MDF F160 MDS F415
Length of the transmission window in mm (L)
SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 280 280 230 280
SLG/SIM 82 ∅ 70 ∅ 70 ∅ 40 ∅ 70
SLA 81 ∅ 70 ∅ 70 ∅ 40 ∅ 70
SLA 82 ∅ 120 ∅ 120 ∅ 120 ∅ 120
Width of the transmission window in mm (W)
SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 110 110 92 110
SLG/SIM 82 30 30 16 30
SLA 81 30 30 16 30
SLA 82 48 48 48 48
Working distance in mm (Sa)
SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 0 to 240 0 to 380 0 to 140 0 to 300
SLG/SIM 82 0 to 65 0 to 110 0 to 60 15 to 90
SLA 81 0 to 65 0 to 110 0 to 60 15 to 90
SLA 82 0 to 140 0 to 180 0 to 90 20 to 150
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-12 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 3-4 Field data of all MDSs and SLGs/SLAs/SIMs
(ANT F5 with 100-mm distance to metal)
MDS MDS F415MDF F160MDS F125MDS F124
SLG/SIM
Limit distance in mm (Sg)
SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 280 420 160 340
SLG/SIM 82 80 140 70 110
SLA 81 80 140 70 110
SLA 82 160 200 120 180
Note
If the range on the SLG/SLA/SIM is not sufficient ...
SCheck power pack/switching power supply for interference. See chapters
3.5 and 3.7.
SMonitor or other source of interference in the vicinity.
See chapter 3.5.
SCheck metallic surroundings. See chapter 3.4.
Table 3-5 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS
MDS F124 MDS F125 MDS F160 MDS F415
SLG/SIM 80 with ANT F5 w 1 m w 1 m w 1 m w 1 m 1
SLG/SIM 82 w 0.3 m w 0.4 m w 0.3 m w 1 m
SLA 81 w 0.3 m w 0.4 m w 0.3 m w 1 m
SLA 82 w 0.6 m w 0.8 m w 0.6 m w 1 m
1 The minimum distance can be reduced for SIM 80 ANT F5 in multi-tag operation. The
MDSs may be located next to each other, but overlapping is not permitted.
Table 3-6 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS 4xx (r/w)
SLG/
SIM 80
ANT F5
SLG/
SIM 82
SLA 81 SLA 82
SLG/SIM 80 with ANT F5 w 5 m w 2 m w 2 m w 3.5 m
SLG/SIM 82 w 2 m w 1.2 m w 1.2 m w 1.6 m
SLA 81 w 2 m w 1.2 m w 1.2 m w 1.6 m
SLA 82 w 3.5 m w 1.6 m w 1.6 m w 2.5 m
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-13
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 3-7 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS 1xx (r/o)
SLG/SIM
80
ANT F5
SLG/SIM
82
SLA 81 SLA 82
SLG/SIM 80 with ANT F5 w 1.5 m w 1 m w 1 m w 1.2 m
SLG/SIM 82 w 1 m w 0.4 m w 0.4 m w 0.8 m
SLA 81 w 1 m w 0.4 m w 0.4 m w 0.8 m
SLA 82 w 1.2 m w 0.8 m w 0.8 m w 1.2 m
Note
The values listed in tables 3-6 and 3-7 must be adhered to. Non-adherence
would affect the inductive fields. Data transmission time would increase to
an unknown value, or a command would be terminated with errors.
A test is recommended for critical applications.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-14 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.3 Relationship of Speed to Amount of Data
The curves shown below will simplify preliminary selection of the MDS and
SLG MOBY F components for dynamic use.
The table in chapter 3.1.3 was used to calculate the curves. The curves are
valid for operation within the transmission window (L).
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
V MDS
(m/sec) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
Write MDS F415
Read MDS F415
1
0.67
0.33
0.16
1.33
0.83
0.5
1.17
Figure 3-7 SLG 80 ANT F5 with MDS F415
0
4
8
12
16
20
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
V MDS
(m/sec) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
Write MDS F415
Read MDS F415
0.27
0.13
0.07
0.33
0.20
Figure 3-8 SLA 81 with MDS F415
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-15
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
V MDS
(m/sec) (m/min)
Number of bytes (n)
Write MDS F415
Read MDS F415
0.67
0.25
0.17
0.75
0.42
0.08
0.33
0.58
0.50
Figure 3-9 SLA 82 with MDS F415
Note
For transversal speed for reading the ID number, see table 3-3.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-16 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.4 Installation Guidelines
The MDS and SLG/SLA/SIM are inductive devices. All types of metal (i.e.,
particularly iron and ferromagnetic materials) in the vicinity of these devices
affect their operation. To ensure that the field data described in chapter 3.2
retain their validity, several points must be adhered to with respect to config-
uration and installation.
SMinimum distance between two antennas
(See tables 3-6/3-7 or chapter 5.)
SMinimum distance to two adjacent data memories
(See table 3-5 and chapter 4.)
SMetal-free space with flush installation of SLG/SLA/SIM ANT F5 in
metal
SInstallation of several antennas on metal frame or support
The next few chapters will discuss how the identification system is affected
when mounted in a metallic environment.
3.4.1 Metal-Free Space
Direct installation of the MDS on metal or flush in metal is not permitted.
The MDS loses all its functions if mounted directly on metal.
For the minimum distance of the MDS to metal, see the applicable para-
graphs on metal-free space in chapter 4.
When installing the SLG/SIM, remember that metal in the vicinity of the
antennas can affect field data. Typical distances to metal are indicated in the
sections on metal-free space in chapters 5 and 6.8.
Metal-free space
for MDS
Metal-free space
for SLG/SIM
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-17
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The ANT F5 must be insulated (i.e., direction installation on metal is not
permitted).
The maximum field data (no interference = 100%) apply when antenna
ANT F5 is mounted 100 mm from metal.
Metal
h = 100 mm (non-metallic spacer)
Figure 3-10 Isolated mounting of ANT F5 on metal
The SLA 81 antenna can be mounted in metal as shown in the following dra-
wing.
Remember to consider possible reduction of the field data (see chap. 3.4.2).
MOBY F
20
View of side
20
40
View of top
Note:
Non-adherence to metal-free space will reduce limit
and working distance!
Metal-free space
with flush mounting
Figure 3-11 SLA 81 mounted in metal
ANT F5
SLG 82/SIM 82/
SLA 81
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-18 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The SLA 82 can be mounted flush in metal. Remember that the field data
may be reduced (see chap. 3.4.2).
Metal-free space with flush mounting:
a = 50 mm
a
Metal
a
a
a
h = 30 mm (non-metallic base)
Figure 3-12 Flush mounting in metal: SLA 82
SLA 82
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-19
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.4.2 Effects on the Transmission Window
The following general points must be adhered to when installing MOBY F
components.
SThe MDS and antennas may not be mounted directly on metal.
SFlush installation of the components in metal reduces the field data.
SInside the transmission window, do not allow metal rails or similar to cut
across the transmission field. The metal rail would affect the field data.
SA test is recommended when critical applications are involved.
STo ensure optimal field data even in metallic environments, the ANT F5
is calibrated at the plant to a distance of 100 mm to metal. See table 3-8.
This chapter uses tables and graphs to illustrate the effects of metal on the
field data (i.e., Sg, Sa, L and W). The values in the tables describe field data
reduction in percentages (i.e., no effect: 100%).
Table 3-8 Reduction of field data in %:
MDS and SLG/SIM with ANT F5 (See figures 3-13/3-14.)
MDS
SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5
without
Metal
ANT F5
on Metal
65-mm
Distance
ANT F5
on Metal
100-mm
Distance
ANT F5
Flush in Metal;
Metal-Free
100-mm
Distance Around
and 100-mm Depth
MDS F124
MDS without metal 75 80 100 100
MDS on metal,
30-mm interval
– 60 75 70
MDS on metal,
50-mm interval
70 165 90 80
MDS F125
MDS without metal 85 80 100 90
MDS on metal,
30-mm interval
55 60 75 70
MDS on metal,
50-mm interval
70 65 80 75
MDS F160
MDS without metal – 65 100 100
MDS on metal
20-mm interval
– 65 75 75
MDS and
SLG 80/SIM 80
with ANT F5
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-20 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 3-8 Reduction of field data in %:
MDS and SLG/SIM with ANT F5 (See figures 3-13/3-14.)
MDS
ANT F5
Flush in Metal;
Metal-Free
100-mm
Distance Around
and 100-mm Depth
ANT F5
on Metal
100-mm
Distance
ANT F5
on Metal
65-mm
Distance
ANT F5
without
Metal
SLG/SIM 80
MDS F415
MDS without metal 90 80 100 90
MDS on metal,
30-mm interval
– 60 75 70
MDS on metal,
50-mm interval
70 65 80 75
1 In this configuration, the MDS F124 must be installed with a distance of w 150 mm
to metal. Underranging this value may cause transmission gaps in the field.
Table 3-9 Reduction of the field data by mounting in metal (in %):
MDS and SLG 82/SIM 82/SLA 81
MDS
SLG/SIM 82
and SLA 81
No Metal Mounted Flush
in Metal;
Metal-Free
20-mm
Distance Around
and 40-mm Depth
MDS F124
MDS without metal 100 65
MDS on metal. Space of 20 mm 90 60
MDS mounted flush in metal.
Space of 20 mm. 20 mm around outside.
75 55
MDS F125
MDS without metal 100 55
MDS on metal. Space of 20 mm 85 50
MDS mounted flush in metal.
Space of 20 mm. 20 mm around outside.
70 45
MDS F160
MDS without metal 100 65
MDS on metal, space of 20 mm 85 60
MDS F415
MDS without metal 100 60
MDS on metal. Space of 20 mm 85 55
MDS mounted flush in metal.
Space of 20 mm. 20 mm around outside.
70 50
MDS and
SLG 82/SIM 82/
SLA 81
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-21
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 3-10 Reduction of the field data by mounting in metal (in %):
MDS with SLA 82
MDS
SLA 82 Without
Metal
SLA 82
on Metal,
Distance:
30 mm
Mounted Flush
in Metal;
Metal-Free
50-mm
Distance Around
and 30-mm Depth
MDS F124
MDS without metal 100 75 70
MDS on metal, distance of 20 mm 70 55 50
MDS mounted flush in metal,
distance of 20 mm, distance around
of 30 mm
55 45 40
MDS F125
MDS without metal 100 80 70
MDS on metal, distance of 20 mm 75 60 50
MDS mounted flush in metal,
distance of 20 mm, distance around
of 30 mm
60 50 40
MDS F160
MDS without metal 100 70 70
MDS on metal, distance of 20 mm 60 55 50
MDS F415
MDS without metal 100 75 70
MDS on metal, distance of 20 mm 80 55 50
MDS mounted flush in metal,
distance of 20 mm, distance around
of 30 mm
60 40 40
MDS with SLA 82
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-22 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The following figures illustrate the effects on the transmission window using
the SLG 80 ANT F5 with the MDS F415 as an example.
The percentages indicate the reduction of field data as related to the ANT F5
and the MDS in a metallic environment. 100% means no effect on the field
data.
MDS F415
90%
MDS F415
80%
MDS F415
ANT F5
100%
MDS F415
90%
100 mm
100 mm 100 mm
ANT F5
ANT F5
Non-metallic spacer-holder
65 mm
100 mm
Non-metal
Metal
Metal
Metal
Non-metallic spacer-holder
Figure 3-13 MDS in metal-free environment
MDS in metal-free
environment
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-23
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
MDS F415
70%
80% 65%
MDS F415
50 mm
75%
ANT F5
ANT F5
50 mm
50 mm50 mm
MDS F415
MDS F415
50 mm50 mm
50 mm50 mm
ANT F5 100 mm
100 mm 100 mm
100 mm
65 mm
Metal
Non-metal
Metal
Non-metal
Metal
Non-metal
Metal
Non-metal
Non-metal
Metal Metal
Metal
Non-metallic spacer-holder
Non-metallic spacer-holder
Figure 3-14 MDS in metallic environment
MDS in metallic
environment
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-24 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.4.3 Reduction of Metallic Effects
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
Sa
MDS
MDS
ANT F5
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ANT F5
Sa
Metal support Non-metallic spacer Sheet metal
Bad
A metal support is located over
the transmission window of the
ANT F5. This affects the en-
tire field. The transmission
window between ANT F5 and
MDS is especially reduced.
Metal
Good
The location of the ANT F5
has been changed so that
the transmission window is
no longer affected.
Figure 3-15 Interfering metal support
Interfering metal
supports
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-25
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Metal
Metal
Enlargement of the non-metal-
lic spacer below the MDS
and/or ANT F5. MDS and/or
SLG are at least 50 mm higher
than their metallic environ-
ment.
At a distance of x > 600 mm
from metal, the field is no lon-
ger noticeably affected.
Non-metallic spacer Sheet metal
Although flush mounting of the
MDS and ANT F5 is always
possible, the size of the trans-
mission window is reduced con-
siderably. The following mea-
sures can be used to counter-
act the reduction of this window.
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÏÏ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
w 50 mm
x > 600 mm
ÏÏ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
aa
b
b
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ANT F5
ANT F5
ANT F5
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
w 50 mm
Enlargement of the non-metal-
lic distances a and b. Rules of
thumb:
SSelect a, b with a factor of
2 to 3 greater.
SEnlargement of a, b has a
greater effect for SLG/MDS
with large limit distance
than for SLG/MDS with
small limit distance.
Figure 3-16 Flush installation
Flush installation
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-26 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Every ANT F5 which is mounted on metal with insulation couples part of the
field on the metal support. If minimum distance D and metal-free spaces a, b
are adhered to, there are usually no counter effects. However, effects are
possible if the location of an iron frame is particularly unfavorable. This in-
creases data transmission times and creates sporadic error messages on the
interface.
a) Enlargement of distance D between the two antennas
ANT F5 A ANT F5 B
D
Non-metallic spacer
b) Insertion of a non-metallic spacer (thickness of 100 millimeters) between
ANT F5 and iron frame. This significantly reduces the parasitic interfer-
ence of the field on the support.
ANT F5 A ANT F5 B
Non-metallic spacer
Installation of
several ANT F5s
on metal frame or
support
What must
be done?
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-27
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.4.4 Chemical Resistance of the Mobile Data Memories
The MDSs F124/F125/F415 are resistant to the substances listed in the fol-
lowing table.
Table 3-11 Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced
epoxy resin (MDS F124/F125/F415)
Concentration 20_ C 40_ C 60_ C
Formic acid 50% J
100% F
Ammonia, gaseous J
Ammonia, liquid, anhydrous j
Ammonium hydroxide 10% J
Ethanol J J
Ethylene glycol J
Gasoline, free of aromatic compounds J
Gasoline, unstripped J
Bezoates (Na-, Ca- and similar) J
Bezoic acid J
Benzine J
Borax J
Boric acid J
Bromine, liquid j
Butadiene (1, 3-) J
Butane, gaseous J
Butanol j
Butyric acid 100% F
Carbonates (ammonia-, Na- and sim.) J
Chlorine, liquid j
Chlorine, gaseous, dry 100% j
Chlorobenzene J
Chloride (ammonia-, Na- and similar) J
Chloroform j
Chlorophyll J
Chlorine water (saturated solution) F
Chromates (K-, Na- and similar) Up to 50% J
Chromic acid Up to 30% j
Chromic sulfuric acid j
Citrates (ammonia-, Na- and similar) J
“Lemon acid” J
Cyanamide J
Cyanides (K-, Na- and similar) J
Cyclohexanol J
Cyclohexanone F
Diethylene glycol J
Bichromates (K- and Na-) J
Dioxan j
Developer J
Acetic acid 100% F
Fixing bath J
Fluorides (ammonia-, K-, Na- and sim.) J
Hydrofluoric acid Up to 40% J
Formaldehyde 50% J
Gluconic acid J
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-28 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 3-11 Chemical resistance of data memories made of fiber glass reinforced
epoxy resin (MDS F124/F125/F415)
60_ C40_ C20_ CConcentration
Glycerin J
Glycocoll J
Urine J
Uric acid J
Hexafluoro silicate (ammonia-. Na- and
similar)
J
Hydroxides (alkaline earth metal-) J
Iodides (K-, Na- and similar) J
Silicic acid J
Methanol 100% J
Methylene chloride j
Lactic acid 100% F
Mineral oils J
Nitrates (ammonia-, K- and similar) J
Nitroglycerin j
Oxalic acid J
Perchlorates (K-) J
Phenol 1% J
Phosphates (ammonia-, Na- and similar) J
Phosphoric acid 50% J
85% J
Propyl alcohol J
Nitric acid 25% j
Hydrochloric acid 10% j
Brine j
Sulfur dioxide 100% F
Carbon bisulphide, 100% j
Sulphuric acid 40% j
Sulphurous acid F
Soap solution J
Sulfates (ammonia-, Na- and similar) J
Sulfites (ammonia-, Na- and similar) j
Tar, free of aromatic compounds J
Turpentine J
Trichlorethlylene j
Tartaric acid J
Explanation of the symbols
JResistant
FSomewhat resistant
jNot resistant
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-29
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.5 EMC Guidelines
3.5.1 Foreword
The EMC guidelines contain the following information.
SWhy are the EMC guidelines necessary?
SWhat interference affects the controller from the outside?
SHow can interference be prevented?
SHow can interference be corrected?
SWhich standards apply to the EMC guidelines?
SExamples of an interference-suppressed system setup
The description is directed to “qualified personnel”.
SConfiguration engineers and planners who plan system configuration with
the MOBY modules and who must adhere to the required guidelines
SSkilled personnel and service engineers who install the connection cables
based on this description or who can correct deficiencies in this area when
a malfunction occurs.
!Warning
Non-adherence to especially highlighted notes can cause dangerous states in
the system or destroy either single components or the entire system.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-30 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.5.2 General
The continuously growing use of electrical and electronic devices brings with
it the following characteristics.
SGreater concentration of components
SIncreasing capacity of power electronics
SRising switching speeds
SLower current consumption of the components
The higher the degree of automation, the greater the danger that devices will
interfere with one another.
SElectromagnetic compatibility (i.e., EMC) is the ability of a piece of elec-
trical or electronic equipment to function correctly in an electromagnetic
environment without interfering with or adversely affecting its surround-
ings within certain limits.
EMC can be divided into three areas.
SIntrinsic interference immunity
Resistance to internal (i.e., own) electrical interference
SFree interference immunity
Resistance to external electromagnetic interference
SDegree of interference emission
Interference emission and effects of the electrical environment
All three areas are included in the test of an electrical device.
The MOBY modules are tested for adherence to the limit values contained in
the CE and BAPT guidelines. Since MOBY modules are only one of many
components in a total system and the combination of various components
may also create sources of interference, certain guidelines must be adhered to
when setting up a system.
EMC measures usually consist of an entire package of measures all of which
must be taken in order to obtain an interference-immune system.
Note
SThe system provider is responsible for adherence to the EMC guidelines,
while the user is responsible for the interference suppression of the com-
plete system.
SAll measures taken while the system is being set up will eliminate the
need for expensive modifications and removal of interference sources
later.
SAlthough the regulations of specific countries must also be adhered to,
this information is not covered in the documentation.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-31
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.5.3 Spreading of Interference
Three components are required so that interference can affect a system.
SSource of interference
SCoupling path
SPotentially susceptible equipment
Potentially susceptible
device
Ex: ASM 470
Interference source
Ex: a drive Ex: MOBY cable
Coupling path
Figure 3-17 Spreading of interference
If one of these components is missing (e.g., the coupling path between the
source of the interference and the potentially susceptible device), the suscep-
tible device will not be affected even when strong interference is being
emitted.
The EMC measures affect all three components to prevent any malfunctions
caused by interference. When a system is set up, the provider must take all
possible measure to prevent the creation of sources of interference.
SOnly equipment which meets limit value class A of VDE 0871 may be
used in a system.
SAll interference caused by devices must be suppressed. This includes all
coils and windings.
SThe layout of the cabinet must be such that reciprocal interference of the
individual components is avoided or kept as low as possible.
SMeasures must be taken to eliminate interference from external sources.
The next few chapters provide information and tips on how to set up a sys-
tem.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-32 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
It is necessary to be familiar with the most frequent sources of interference in
order to achieve a high degree of electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., a very
low degree of interference in the environment) in a system. These sources of
interference must be eliminated by taking appropriate measures.
Table 3-12 Interference sources: Origin and effects
Interference Source Interference Origin Effect on Potentially
Susceptible Equipment
Contactor, electronic
valves
Contacts
Coils
Power network malfunctions
Magnetic field
Electric motor Collector
Winding
Electrical field
Magnetic field
Electric welding device Contacts
Transformer
Electrical field
Magnetic field, power network
malfunction, equalizing currents
Power pack, switched-
mode
Circuit Electrical and magnetic field,
power network malfunction
High-frequency devices Circuit Electromagnetic field
Sender (e.g., industrial
radios)
Antenna Electromagnetic field
Difference in grounding
or reference potential
Voltage difference Equalizing currents
Operator Static charging Electrical discharging currents,
electrical field
High-voltage current ca-
ble
Current flow Electrical and magnetic field,
power network malfunction
High-voltage cable Voltage difference Electrical field
Monitors Circuit Electromagnetic field
Defective neon lamps Starter Power network malfunction
Energy-saver lamps Circuit Electromagnetic field
Computer, PC Circuit Electromagnetic field
Sources of
interference
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-33
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
A coupling path is required before interference generated by the source can
take effect. There are four kinds of interference coupling.
MOBY
ASM o.
SLG
MOBY
ASM o.
SLG
MOBY
ASM o.
SLG
MOBY
ASM o.
SLG
Galvanic coupling path
Capacitive coupling path
Capacitive coupling path
Emission coupling
I
N
T
E
R
F
E
R
E
N
C
E
S
O
U
R
C
E
P
O
T
E
N
T
I
A
L
L
Y
S
U
S
C
E
P
T
I
B
L
E
D
E
V
I
C
E
Figure 3-18 The four kinds of interference coupling
When MOBY modules are used, various components of the total system can
act as coupling paths.
Table 3-13 Causes of coupling paths
Coupling Path Cause
Cables and lines Incorrect or unfavorable installation
Missing or incorrectly connected shields
Cables spaced unfavorably
Switching cabinet or
SIMATIC h i
Missing or incorrectly wired equalizing line
SIMATIC housing Missing or incorrect grounding
Cables spaced unfavorably
Modules not installed securely
Poor cabinet layout
Coupling paths
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-34 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.5.4 The FFT Command
The FFT command filters EMC interference from the environment. This
means that you can still use the MOBY F in environments where other identi-
fication systems fail.
Typical example:
Computer monitors or switching power packs cause such interference in the
environment that a MOBY F SLG may no longer be able to function fully
when in the vicinity of these devices. The maximum read-access distance
may be reduced to 0.
Use of the FFT command restores the maximum read-access distance again.
The FFT command (Fast Fourier Transformation) is a command to the proc-
essor of the read/write device (SLG). The FFT command causes the proces-
sor of the SLG to screen out interference signals in the area around the SLG.
The FFT command should be used under the following conditions.
SWhen the interference environment around the SLG changes
SAfter the SLG is turned on
SWhen processing of the MDS commands takes longer than stated in the
documentation
SIn critical applications, the FFT command can be started prior to every
MDS command.
SThe SLG automatically performs an FFT once after being turned on.
The FFT command may not be used under the following conditions.
SWhen a fixed code MDS (MDS 1xx) is located near an SLG
The FFT command requires a processing time of approx. 110 msec.
The FFT command is started by the user with a special command. Execution
of the command varies depending on the interface. The next few pages de-
scribe how the FFT command is handled on the different interfaces.
The FFT command is started with the special command with the subcode
0005.
Command Code Length Subcode Data (DATDB)
FFT command 04 01 0005 1st data byte
01 = FFT command
Features for the
user
Use
Processing time
Execution of the
command
FFT command for
FB 250/ASM 400
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-35
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
00
00
00
00
xx
00
00
Bit 76543210
01 = Execute FFT
01 = Read
00 = Acknowledge
1 = Special command
(observe byte 6 of PIO)
Status command:
The status command executes an FFT command on the ASM in addition to
the status scan. The MOBY F must have been parameterized beforehand.
The command is available with both the FB/FC and the user interface.
The FFT command is performed with the “antenna on/off” command and
sub_command = 09.
System command:
The INIT command is usually redefined into a system command. This en-
sures compatibility at lower levels.
Before the FFT command can be used, one of the MOBY F modes must have
already been set. The following table shows the parameterization for the dif-
ferent MOBY interfaces.
Table 3-14 Parameterization of the MOBY F operating modes for the FFT command
Operating
Mode
ASM 400 ASM 410 ASM 450 ASM 470
FB 250 FC 44/
FB 240
User
interface
(opt. 1)
FC 47/
FB 47
User
interface
(byte 3)
MOBY F
MDS F1xx3
91 191 2 (byte 5
in PIO)
5 A 5 A
MOBY F
MDS F4xx
92 192 26 B 6 B
MOBY F
MDS F2xx
93 193 27 C 7 C
1 The subcode for this parameterization is 0004.
2 The presence check must be turned off before the MOBY F is turned on. The presence
(ANW) check can be turned on at the same time as the MOBY F.
3 The FFT command is not permitted with the MDS F1xx (is rejected with error 0F).
Note
The FFT command is only available with SLG 80 ANT F5 and
SIM 80 ANT F5.
FFT command
with ASM 410
FFT command
with FC 44,
FB 240/ASM 450
FFT command
with FC 45/
ASM 452
FFT command
with FC 47,
FB 47/ASM 470
Parameterizing the
MOBY modes
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-36 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.5.5 Cabinet Layout
User influence on the configuration of an interference-immune system in-
cludes the cabinet layout, cable installation, grounding connections and cor-
rect shielding of lines.
Note
For notes on correct cabinet layout in accordance with EMC guidelines, see
the layout guidelines of the SIMATIC controller.
Metal housings for potentially susceptible equipment can be used to keep out
magnetic and electrical fields and electromagnetic waves. The better the
induced interference current can flow, the greater the spontaneous weakening
of the field of interference. All sheet metal on the housings or sheet metal in
the cabinet must be well connected together (i.e., with a high degree of con-
ductivity).
Figure 3-19 Shielding via housing
When the sheet metal parts of switching cabinets are insulated against each
other, a high-frequency conductive connection with the ribbon cables and
high-frequency terminals or HF conductive paste can be created. The greater
the connection surface, the better the high-frequency conductive capacity.
This cannot be achieved by connection with simple wires.
Shielding
via housing
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-37
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Good interference diversion is achieved by installing SIMATIC controllers on
conductive mounting plates (unpainted). When setting up the switching cabi-
net, interference can be easily avoided by adhering to guidelines. Power
components (e.g., transformers, drives and load power supplies) should be
installed separately (i.e., separated by space) from the controller components
(e.g., relay controllers and SIMATIC S5).
The following basic principles apply.
1. The effect of interference decreases the greater the distance between in-
terference source and potentially susceptible equipment.
2. Interference is further reduced by installing shielding plates.
3. Load lines and high-voltage current cables must be installed separately
from the signal lines at a distance of at least 10 cm.
PS
CPU/EU
Drive
Shielding
plate
Figure 3-20 Avoidance of interference via optimal layout
Avoiding interfe-
rence via optimal
layout
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-38 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
External interference from the power network can be avoided by installing
power network filters. In addition to correct dimensioning, proper installa-
tion is very important. It is imperative that the power network filter be
installed directly at the entrance to the cabinet. Interference currents are fil-
tered out early at the entrance and not conducted through the cabinet.
Power filter
Is
Right
Power filter
Wrong
IS = Interference current
Is
Figure 3-21 Filtering the supply voltage
Filtering the sup-
ply voltage
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-39
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.5.6 Avoiding Interference Sources
Sources of interference in a system must be avoided so that a higher degree
of interference immunity can be achieved. All circuited inductivities are a
frequent cause of interference in a system.
Since relays, contactors and so on generate interference voltages, this inter-
ference must be suppressed with one of the following circuits.
When the coil is switched, up to 800 V can be created on 24 V coils even
with small relays. Several kV can be created on 220 V coils. By using free-
wheeling diodes or RC circuitry, the interference voltage is prevented and,
with it, the inductive interference in the lines parallel to the coil lines.
Relay coils
Contactors
Valves
Brakes
Figure 3-22 Inductive interference
Note
All coils in the cabinet must be interference-suppressed. Valves and motor
brakes are frequently forgotten. Fluorescent lamps in the switching cabinet
must be subjected to a special test.
Interference sup-
pression of induc-
tivities
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-40 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.5.7 Equipotential Bonding
Differing system part layouts and differing voltage levels can cause differ-
ences in potential between the parts of a system. When the system parts are
connected via signal lines, equalizing currents flow through these signal
lines. These equalizing currents can distort the signals.
This makes correct equipotential bonding imperative.
SThe cross section of the equipotential bonding line must be large enough
(i.e., at least 10 mm2).
SThe space between signal cable and related equipotential bonding line
must be kept as small as possible (i.e., antenna effect).
SA fine-wire line must be used (i.e., better conduction of high frequencies).
SWhen connecting equipotential bonding lines to the central equipotential
bonding rail, power components and non-power components must be
combined.
Power pack
PLC
EU
EU
EU
Drive
wrong
wrong
Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2
Figure 3-23 Equipotential bonding
The better the equipotential bonding in a system, the smaller the chance of
interference caused by fluctuations in potential.
Equipotential bonding should not be confused with the protective grounding
of a system. Protective grounding prevents the creation of excessive touch
voltages when devices malfunction.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-41
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.5.8 Ground Fault Monitoring with MOBY
SLG
230 V
24 V
ASM
L+
L-
Ungrounded
power pack
Ground fault monitoring device
When a voltage asymmetry against pro-
tective ground occurs on lines L+ or L-,
the current circuit is interrupted.
Interface to the computer or PC
To connect a grounded computer or PC, the con-
nection must contain a galvanic coupling (e.g.,
optocoupler).
R
RR
R
Figure 3-24 Circuit diagram of the principle of grounding fault monitoring
The SIMATIC is a grounded system. In the power pack of the SIMATIC, 0 V
(i.e., signal ground) is connected to the housing. On the ASM 400, the 0 V
signal of the external 24 V power pack is connected with 0 V of the SIMA-
TIC. The connection between the ASM 400 (SIMATIC) and the SLG is equi-
potentially bonded (i.e., RS 422 interface without galvanic isolation). A
direct setup with grounding fault monitoring is not possible. Proceed as
described in the SIMATIC manual if grounding fault monitoring is necessary.
230V
24V
Grounding
fault monito-
ring
C
P
U
PLC 100U
Galvanic isolation
SLG
ASM 410
Figure 3-25 SIMATIC PLC 100U with ASM 410
The ASM 410 is equipped with galvanic isolation to the SIMATIC CPU. A
layout with grounding fault monitoring is simple.
SIMATIC with
ASM 400
SIMATIC AG 100U
with ASM 410
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-42 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.5.9 Shielding the Cables
To suppress interference in the signal cables, these cables must be shielded.
The best shielding effect is achieved by installation in steel piping. However,
this is only necessary when the signal lines must pass through an interfer-
ence-prone environment. In most cases, the use of braided shields is suffi-
cient. In either situation, correct connection is decisive for the shielding ac-
tion.
Note
A shield which is not connected at all or is connected incorrectly has no
shielding effect.
The following principles apply.
SFor analog signal lines, the shield connection must be one-sided and on
the receiver side.
SFor digital signal lines, the shield connection must be two-sided on the
housing.
SSince interference signals are frequently in the HF range (i.e., > 10 kHz),
connection of the HF-capacity shield must be provided over a large sur-
face.
Figure 3-26 Shielding of the cables
The shield rail must be connected to the housing of the switching cabinet
over a large surface (i.e., good conductivity) and must be located as close to
the cable lead-in as possible. The cables must be bared and clamped (high-
frequency clamp) to the shield rail or be bound with cable binders. The loca-
tion must have good conductivity.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-43
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Remove
paint
Cable binder
Figure 3-27 Connection of the shield rail
The shield bar must be connected with the protective ground (PE) bar.
When shielded cables must be interrupted, the shield must also be applied to
the plug connector housing. Only suitable plug connectors may be used.
ÔÔÔÔÔ
ÖÖÖÖ
ÖÖÖÖ
Shield turned up backwards
by 180° and connected with
the plug connector housing
Rubber sleeve
Figure 3-28 Interruption of shielded cables
When adapter plugs which do not have suitable shield termination are used,
the shield must be continued through cable clamps to the point of interrup-
tion. This ensures a large-surface, HF conductive connection.
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-44 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.5.10 Basic Rules on EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (i.e., EMC) can often be ensured by following
a few elementary rules. Rules which apply to the layout of the cabinet are
listed below.
SProtect the programmable controller from external interference by instal-
ling it in a cabinet or housing. The cabinet or the housing must be in-
cluded in the grounding connection.
SShield electromagnetic fields of inductivity from the programmable con-
troller with separator plates.
SUse metallic plug housings for shielded data transmission lines.
SConnect all inactive metal parts with low HF resistance over a large sur-
face.
SProvide a large-surface connection between the inactive metal parts and
the central grounding point.
SRemember to connect the shield bar to ground (i.e., a large-area connec-
tion of the shield bar to ground must be provided).
SAluminum parts should not be used for grounding connections.
SOrganize the cables into groups, and install these groups separately.
SAlways install high-voltage current lines and signal lines in separate ducts
or bundles.
SIntroduce all cabling into the cabinet from only one side and, if possible,
at one level.
SInstall the signal lines as close to the grounding surfaces as possible.
STwist the feeder and return conductors of individually installed conduc-
tors.
Shielding via hou-
sing
Large-surface
grounding connec-
tion
Planning the ca-
bling
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-45
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
SShield the data transmission lines, and apply the shield on both sides.
SShield the analog lines, and apply the shield on one side (e.g., on the
drive).
SAlways apply the line shields at the cabinet entrance to the shield bar over
a large surface, and secure these with clamps.
SContinue the applied shield without interruption to the module.
SUse braided shields and not foil shields.
SOnly use power supply filters with metal housings.
SConnect the filter housing (i.e., connection must be low HF resistant and
over a large surface) to cabinet ground.
SNever secure the filter housing to painted surfaces.
SSecure the filter at the cabinet entrance or in the direction of the interfer-
ence source.
Shielding the lines
Power supply and
signal filter
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-46 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.6 Concept of MOBY Shielding
With MOBY the data are transferred between ASM and SLG over an RS 422
interface at a speed of 19200 baud. The distance between ASM and SLG
may be up to 1000 m. MOBY cable installation should be treated the same
as that of a data processing system. Special attention should be paid to
shielding of all data cables. The following figure shows the primary points
required for a secure layout.
Ï
Ï
grounding
screw1
1 The SLG must be grounded on the
grounding screw provided.
Additional
SLGs
The cable shield is ap-
plied to the SLG plug
connector on the appro-
priate shield pin. The
cable shield of the SLG
may not be applied to a
grounded point (i.e., no
grounding clamp).
Each cabinet is
centrally grounded.
The cable jacket of the SLG cables must be ba-
red directly at the cable lead-in. A shield clamp
is used for the connection of the cable shield to
the grounding bar. This will divert interference
voltages of + 2.5 kV on the SLG cable. Careful
shield connection is particularly important for
long cables or interference-prone industrial envi-
ronments.
Grounding bar for all shielded cables. It must be located
as close as possible to the cable lead-in in the cabinet.
The bar must be grounded to the cabinet over a large
surface and use short connections.
230V
24V
DC
90 to
AC
Figure 3-29 Simple layout with ASM 400
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-47
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
To divert interference which can occur on the connection cable to the SLG,
use the same measures as described for the ASM 400.
When connecting the SLG to the ASM 470, it is essential that a shield con-
nection terminal be used for the cable shield. Shield connection terminals
and holders are standard components of the S7-300 product family.
Shield connection terminal Holder
Cable to SLG 1 Cable to SLG 2
Figure 3-30 Layout of the ASM 470 with shield connecting element
To ensure EMC, an S7-300 shield connecting element must be used for the
SLG cable. See figure 3-30. The shield of the SLG cable must be bared as
shown in figure 3-31.
170
30
Specifications in mm
Figure 3-31 Baring of the cable shield
Connection of
other modules
(e.g., ASM 410)
Layout of an
S7-300 with MOBY
Cabling
for ASM 470
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-48 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.7 Cable and Plug Connector Allocation
The cable jacket used for the standard MOBY SLG/SIM data cable is made
of polyurethane (PUR in accordance with VDE 0250). This provides excel-
lent resistance to oils, acids, lye and hydraulic liquids.
3.7.1 Cable Configuration
The cable between the ASM and the SLG requires five cores + shield.
The data can be transmitted over distances up to 1000 m almost regardless of
the wire diameter. Standard cable LiYC11Y recommended by Siemens (see
table 3-25 for standard plug-in lines).
We recommend always leading (large area) the shield of the SLG 80 ANT F5
cable to a grounding rail.
The SLG/SIM can also be connected with a cable with drag capability.
Recommended cable type: HPM Paartronic 3340-C-PUR 3 2 0.25.
The cable can be made by the customer.
The voltage supply of the SLG / SIM / ASM 824/850/854 is provided by a
4-pole plug connector.
It is essential to consider the voltage drop on the supply cable.
The permissible length of the voltage supply cable depends on the current
consumption of the SLG / SIM / ASM 824/850/854 and on the ohmic resist-
ance of the connection cable.
Table 3-15 Voltage supply of the SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 and SLG/SIM 82
SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5 SLG/SIM 82
Nominal value 24 V DC 24 V DC
Permissible range 20 to 30 V
(meas. on plug of SLG/SIM)
20 to 30 V
(meas. on plug of SLG/SIM)
Current consumption
Startup current
At 24 V
1.5 A
0.6 A (without DO)
1.1 A (with DO, only SIM)
1.1 A
0.25 A
–
Grounding the
SLG 80 ANT F5
data cable
Cable with drag
capability
Voltage supply for
the SLG/SIM/
ASM 824/850/854
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-49
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 3-16 Maximum ripple of the supply voltage for SLG/SIM 80 (based on fre-
quency range)
fripple (kHz) Uripple max. (mV RMS)
fripple t 0.5 48
0.5 v fripple t 20 7
20 v fripple t 120 36
120 v fripple t 130 12
fripple u 130 48
Note
For SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5
When a switching power pack is used, make sure that the switching fre-
quency is in the range of 160 kHz < fswitch < 200 kHz.
3.7.2 Plug Connector Allocations
Table 3-17 Plug connector allocation of the SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5/SLG 82
plug connector (pin housing side)
Designation
Pin SLG 80 ANT F5
SLG 82
(RS 422)
SIM 80 ANT F5
(RS 232)
1Cable shield Cable shield
2+ Receive TxD Send
3+ Send RxD Receive
4Not used Digital input
5– Send Ground (0 V)
6– Receive Not used
7Ground (0 V) Not used
8Cable shield Cable shield
9Not used Digital output
Housing Not used Not used
!Caution
If metallized sub D housings are used on the SLG/SIM side, the housing
must be connected with the cable shield.
SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5
SLG 82
9-pole submin D plug
connector with screw-
type lock
Plug connector on
SLG/SIM
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-50 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 3-18 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D1 (socket housing side)
Socket Designation
1Not used
2+ Send
3+ Receive
4Not used
5– Receive
6– Send
7Ground (0 V)
8Not used
9Not used
Housing Cable shield
1This plug connector allocation is valid for ASM 400 => SLG
Table 3-19 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D1
(socket housing side)
Socket Designation
1+6.6 Volt
2+ Send
3+ Receive
4CLK +
5- Receive
6- Send
7Ground (0 V)
8+24 Volt
9CLK -
Housing Cable shield
1 This plug connector allocation is valid for
SLG 82, SIM 82, ASM 824, ASM 850, ASM 854 <=> SLA 81/SLA 82
ASM 400
9-pole submin D plug
connector with screw-
type lock
Plug connector
on ASM 400
ASM 824/850/854
9-pole submin D plug
connector with screw-
type lock
Plug connector on
SLG/SIM 82.
ASM 824/850/854
(to SLA 81/SLA 82)
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-51
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 3-20 Plug connector allocation of SLA plug connector1
(pin housing side)
Pin Designation
1+6.6 Volt
2+ Send
3+ Receive
4CLK +
5- Receive
6- Send
7CLK -
8Ground (0 V)
1 This plug connector allocation is valid for
SLA 81/SLA 82 <=> SLG 82, SIM 82, ASM 824, ASM 850, ASM 854
Table 3-21 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D1
(socket housing side)
Socket Designation
RS 232 RS 422
1Not used Not used
2TxD (send) D- (send)
3RxD (receive) E- (receive)
4Not used Not used
5Ground (0 V) Ground (0 V)
6Not used Not used
7Not used Not used
8Not used D+ (send)
9Not used E+ (receive)
Housing Cable shield Cable shield
1 This plug connector allocation is valid for
SIM 82, ASM 824, ASM 850, ASM 854 (plug “SERIAL”).
Ordering data
Table 3-22 Ordering data for counterplug IP65
Counterplug IP65 for SLG and SIM
(9-pin, submin, D plug connector, socket)
6GT2 490-1AA00
SLA 81/SLA 82
Plug connector on SLA 81
View of top
1
6
5
4
3
2
8
7
9-pole submin D plug
connector with screw-
type lock
Plug “SERIAL” on
SIM 82. ASM 824/850/854
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-52 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 3-23 Plug connector allocation of 4-pole voltage supply plug connector
(pin housing side)
Pin Designation
1Ground (0 V)
2+ 24 V
3+ 24 V
4Ground (0 V)
Ordering data
Table 3-24 Ordering data for voltage supply plug
Plug for voltage supply (socket)
for SLG/SIM 82, ASM 824/850/854
6GT2 390-1AB00
1
4
2
3
Voltage supply plug
connector on SLG/SIM
on SLG 80/82. SIM 80/82.
ASM 824/850/854
View of top
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-53
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.7.3 Connection Cables
Housing
9-pole submin D
(pins, screw-
type-lock)
2
6
3
5
7
2
6
3
5
7
8
2
1
ASM side SLG side1
1Caution
If metallized sub D housings are used on the SLG/SIM side, the housing must
be connected with the cable shield.
9-pole submin D
(socket, screw-
type-lock)
(Shield)
Figure 3-32 Connection cable: ASM 400 ↔ SLG
6
3
5
7
3 (7)
4 (8)
5 (9)
6 (10)
2
2
8
1
ASM side SLG side1
1Caution
If metallized sub D housings are used on the SLG/SIM side, the housing must
be connected with the cable shield.
9-pole submin D
(socket, screw-
type-lock)
(Shield)
(Shield)
Cable with core end sleeves
Brown
White
Green
Yellow
Gray
Figure 3-33 Connection cable: ASM 410 ↔ SLG
!Caution
The cable shield must be secured with a shield clamp directly on the inter-
face module and grounded via a grounding rail.
Connection cable
for
ASM 400 ↔ SLG
6GT2 491-0A...
Connection cable
for
ASM 410 ↔ SLG
6GT2 491-0D...
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-54 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
(Shield)
2
6
3
5
7
Two 5-pole M12
round plug connec-
tors
X1/2
X1/3
X1/1
X1/4
X2/3
X1/5
X2/5
11
8
9-pole submin D
(socket, screw-
type-lock)
ASM side SLG side1
1Caution
If metallized sub D housings are used on the SLG/SIM side, the housing must
be connected with the cable shield.
X1 X2
25
18.5
Figure 3-34 Connection cable: ASM 450/452/473 ↔ SLG
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
(Shield)
Cable shield bared
Cable with core end sleeves
2
6
3
5
7
8
4 (12)
5 (13)
6 (14)
7 (15)
9 (17)
1
9-pole submin D
(socket, screw-
type-lock)
ASM side SLG side1
1Caution
If metallized sub D housings are used on the SLG/SIM side, the housing must
be connected with the cable shield.
Figure 3-35 Connection cable: ASM 470/475 ↔ SLG
Note
The SLG voltage supply cannot be connected via the ASM.
Connection cable
for
ASM 450/452/473
↔ SLG
6GT2 491-1C...
Connection cable
for ASM 470/475
↔ SLG
6GT2 491-0E...
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-55
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3
5
2
3
5
8
2
1
PC (RS 232) side SIM side1
TxD
RxD
0 V
TxD
RxD
0 V
Total length: 5 m
Test cable for DI/DO
Designation
12345
6789
Terminal
Cable shield1
TxD Send2
RxD Receive3
Digital input4
Ground (0 V)5
Not used6
Not used7
Cable shield8
Digital output9
Pin Allocation of Terminal Module
Adapter
0.53 m
(Shield)
9-pole submin D
(socket, screw-
type-lock)
1Caution
If metallized sub D housings
are used on the SLG/SIM
side, the housing must be
connected with the cable
shield.
9-pole submin D
(socket, screw-
type-lock)
Housing
Figure 3-36 Connection cable: PC ↔ SIM 80 ANT F5 (not for SIM 82)
5 m/20 m
PC side
9-pole submin D
(socket, screw-
type-lock)
SLG side
9-pole submin D
(socket, screw-
type-lock)
Housing
3
55
2
1
(Shield)
TxD
RxD
0 V
TxD
RxD
0 V
3
2
8
Figure 3-37 Connecting cable RS 232 PC ↔ SLG
Connection cable
RS 232; PC ↔
SIM 80 ANT F5
6GT2 491-1DH50
Connecting cable
RS 232; PC ↔ SLG
6GT2 691-0BH50
6GT2 691-0BN20
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-56 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
9-pole submin D
(pins, screw-type-
lock)
Housing
1
2
3
4
5
6
* When made by customer, up to max. of 32 m
PC sideSIM/ASM side
9-pole submin D
(socket, screw-
type-lock)
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RxD TxD
TxD RxD
0 V 0 V
Housing
5 m*
Figure 3-38 Connection cable, RS 232 PC ↔ SIM 82/ASM 824
9-pole submin D
(pins, screw-type-
lock)
1
2
3
4
5
6
SLA sideASM side
SLA plug,
M12, socket
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 m
Pin 8 free
Figure 3-39 Connection cable, SLG/SIM 82; ASM 824/850/854 ↔ SLA 81/SLA 82
Connection cable
RS 232
PC ↔ SIM 82/
ASM 824
6GT2 391-0BH50
Connection cable
SLG/SIM 82;
ASM 824/850/854
↔ SLA 81/SLA 82
6GT2 391-1AH50
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-57
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
8-pole, M12 pins
for connection
cable SLA 81
6GT2 391-1AH50
1
2
3
4
5
6
SLA sideCoupling side
SLA plug
M12 socket
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10 m/25 m
Figure 3-40 Extension cable, SLG/SIM 82; ASM 824/850/854 ↔ SLA 81/SLA 82
4-pole,
M12 pins
1
2
3
4
SLG/SIM/ASM sidePower pack side
4-pole,
M12 socket
1
2
3
4
5 m
Figure 3-41 24 V DC stub line SLG/SIM/ASM ↔ MOBY wide-range power pack
Extension cable,
SLG/SIM 82;
ASM 824/850/854
↔ SLA 81/SLA 82
6GT2 391-1BN10
6GT2 391-1BN25
24 V DC stub line
SLG 80/82;
SIM 80/82;
ASM 824/850/854
↔ MOBY wide-
range power pack
6GT2 491-1HH50
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
3-58 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3.7.4 Cable length
The length key for MOBY cables is no longer supported as of 10.01.2001 and
cables are now only offered in certain lengths (see table 3-25).
Cable fabrication by the customer continues to be possible in all lengths.
Table 3-25 Ordering data for MOBY cables
SLG stub line, ready for use
Between
SASM 400 and SLG 8x
Length: 5 m
20 m
6GT2 491-0AH50
6GT2 491-0AN20
SASM 410 and SLG 8x
Length: 5 m
20 m
6GT2 491-0DH50
6GT2 491-0DN20
SASM 450/452/473 and SLG 8x
Length: 2 m
5 m
20 m
6GT2 491-1CH20
6GT2 491-1CH50
6GT2 491-1CN20
SASM 470/475 and SLG 8x
Length: 5 m
20 m
50 m
6GT2 491-0EH50
6GT2 491-0EN20
6GT2 491-0EN50
Standard connection cable between
SLA 81/SLA 82 ↔ ASM 824/850/854
(Length: 5 m, not included with the SLA)
6GT2 391-1AH50
Extension for antenna line SLA 81/SLA 82
6GT2 391-1AH50
Length: 10 m
25 m
6GT2 391-1BN10
6GT2 391-1BN25
Stub line, 24 V
24 V DC stub line for wide-range power pack
6GT2 494-0AA00
Length: 5 m 6GT2 491-1HH50
RS 232 stub line
Between PC and ASM 824 or SIM 82
Length: 5 m 6GT2 391-0BH50
Between PC and SLG 8x
Length: 5 m
20 m
6GT2 691-0BH50
6GT2 691-0BN20
Between PC and SIM 80 ANT F5
Length: 5 m 6GT2 491-1DH50
Configuration and Mounting Guidelines
4-1
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Mobile Data Memories 4
4-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
4.1 Introduction
With MOBY, identification is automatic, fast and reliable. The data stored
on a mobile data memory (i.e., MDS) accompany a product, work piece car-
rier, or a transport or packaging unit throughout the entire material flow pro-
cess.
The MDS is available in various models to permit specific selection for the
desired application. When an MDS is affixed to the unit to be identified,
data can be stored inductively (i.e., no contact required) on the MDS and up-
dated inductively or read at every stage of the material flow process.
The sturdy construction of the MDSs permits use under very rugged condi-
tions and ensures resistance to many chemical substances.
Mobile data memories (MDSs) are built from the following primary compo-
nents.
SAntenna – receipt of power and receipt/sending of data signals
SLogic – A/D-D/A conversion, memory access and data backup
SMemory – fixed code (read-only) or EEPROM memory (read-write), de-
pending on the model
SHousing – reliable protection against environmental conditions
When an MDS moves into the transmission field of the read/write device
(SLG), it is powered by this field. The logic monitors the power supply and
handles conversion of the analog-modulated signals into digital information.
Depending on the requested function, the logic performs test and memory
operations and sends appropriately converted analog-modulated signals back
to the SLG.
MOBY F offers MDSs with fixed code (read-only) and EEPROM memories
(read-write).
Table 4-1 Overview of the MDS
MDS Type Memory Size Temperature
Range
(During
Operation)
Dimensions
(D x H)
in mm
Protec-
tion
Rating
MDS F124 40-bit fixed code –25° to +100°CĞ30 x 1 IP67
MDS F125 40-bit fixed code –25° to +100°CĞ50 x 1 IP67
MDS F160 40-bit fixed code –25° to +85°CĞ16 x 3 IP68
MDS F415 256-byte EEPROM 1–25° to +100°CĞ50 x 1 IP67
1 192-byte EEPROM can be used with SLG. 224-byte EEPROM can be used with SIM.
Application area
Layout and
functions
Übersicht
Mobile Data Memories
4-3
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 4-2 Operational requirements/environmental requirements of MDS
MDS F124/MDS F125/
MDS F160/MDS F415
Proof of mechanical stability is provided
by oscillation test in accordance with:
Test conditions:
Frequency range
Amplitude excursion
Acceleration
Test duration per axis
EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3
2 to 500 Hz
7.5 mm (2 to 9 Hz)
2 g (9 to 200 Hz)
4 g (200 to 500 Hz)
20 frequency cycles
Proof of mechanical stability via continu-
ous shock stress in accordance with:
Test conditions:
Acceleration
Duration
Test duration per axis
EN 60721-3-7, class 7M3
100 g
6 msec
500 impacts per axis
Protection rating IP67/IP68 in acc. w. EN 60529
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25 °C to +85/+100 °C
–25/–40 °C to +100/+130 °C
Temperature gradient in storage
temperature range in acc. w.
part 2-4 of DIN IEC 68
3°C/min
Temperature gradient for fast
temperature change in acc. w.
part 2-14 of DIN IEC 68
Duration: 30 min per extreme
Change from one extreme to other:
Approx. 10 sec, 100 cycles
Torsion and bending stress Not permitted
MTBF 2.5 x 106 hours
Definition of IP67
– Protection against penetration of dust (i.e., dust-proof)
– Full protection against touch
– Protection against water under specified pressure and time
Definition of IP68
– Protection against penetration of dust (i.e., dust-proof)
– Full protection against touch
– The MDS can be immersed in water (24 hr, 2 m).
Operational
requirements/
environmental
requirements
Mobile Data Memories
4-4 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
4.2 MDS F124
Figure 4-1 MDS F124
Table 4-3 Ordering data for MDS F124
Order No.
MDS F124 mobile data memory
40-bit fixed code
6GT2 400-1CE00
Table 4-4 Technical data of MDS F124
Memory size 40 bits (ID no.)
Memory organization Fixed code
Multi-tag capability No
MTBF 2.5 x 106 hours
Read cycles Unlimited
Read distance See field data.
Vibration 20 g
Shock 100 g
Torsion and bending stress Not permitted
Direction dependency No
Securing of MDS Adhesive, recessed head screw
(M3)
Turning moment at + 20° C v 1 Nm
Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP67
Physical design Pressed, impact-proof epoxide ma-
terial
Color Black
Material Epoxide resin
Dimensions (D x H) in mm ∅30 x 1
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-5
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 4-4 Technical data of MDS F124
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25° C to +100° C
–40° C to +130° C
Weight (approx.) 5 g
!Caution
When switching through the SLG/SIM supply voltage, make sure that there
is no MDS F124 in the transmission window of the SLG/SIM antenna.
Table 4-5 Field data of MDS F124
SLG 80/
SIM 80 ANT F5
SLG 82/
SIM 82/
SLA 81
SLA 82
Operating distance (Sa)0 to 240 mm 0 to 65 mm 0 to 140 mm
Limit distance (Sg)280 mm 80 mm 160 mm
Transmission window (L) 280 mm ∅ 70 mm ∅ 120 mm
Minimum distance from
MDS to MDS w 1 m w 0.3 m w 0.6 m
∅ 3.05
∅30"0.2 1"0.2
Figure 4-2 Dimensions of the MDS F124
Field data
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-6 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
h > 50 mm 1
1 With the “ANT F5 without metal” configuration, the MDS F124 must be
mounted with a distance of w 150 mm to metal. See chapter 3.4.2.
Non-adherence to this value may cause transmission gaps in the field.
Metal
Non-metal
Data memory
Mounting on Metal
Flush installation of the MDS in metal is not permitted
in combination with SLG 80/SIM 80!
Figure 4-3 Metal-free space for the MDS F124
Note
Underranging the guideline values (h) will significantly decrease the field
data. See chap. 3.4.2. Mounting of the MDS with metal screws (M3 cylin-
der head) is possible. This does not noticeably reduce its range.
A test is recommended for critical applications.
For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information
in chapter 3.4.2.
Metal-free space
Mobile Data Memories
4-7
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
4.3 MDS F125
Figure 4-4 MDS F125
Table 4-6 Ordering data for MDS F125
Order No.
MDS F125 mobile data memory
40-bit fixed code
6GT2 400-1CF00
Table 4-7 Technical data of MDS F125
Memory size 40 bits (ID no., 5 bytes)
Memory organization Fixed code
Multi-tag capability No
MTBF 2.5 x 106 hours
Read cycles Unlimited
Read distance See field data.
Vibration 20 g
Shock 100 g
Torsion and bending stress Not permitted
Direction dependency No
Securing of MDS Adhesive, M4 screw
Turning moment at + 20° C v 1Nm
Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP67
Physical design Pressed, impact-proof epoxide
material
Color Black
Material Epoxide material
Dimensions (D x H) in mm ∅50 x 1
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-8 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 4-7 Technical data of MDS F125
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25° C to +100° C
–40° C to +130° C
Weight (approx.) 5 g
!Caution
When switching through the SLG/SIM supply voltage, make sure that there
is no MDS F125 in the transmission window of the SLG/SIM antenna.
Table 4-8 Field data of MDS F125
SLG 80/
SIM 80 ANT F5
SLG 82/
SIM 82/
SLA 81
SLA 82
Operating distance (Sa)0 to 380 mm 0 to 110 mm 0 to 180 mm
Limit distance (Sg)420 mm 140 mm 200 mm
Transmission window (L) 280 mm ∅ 70 mm ∅ 120 mm
Minimum distance from
MDS to MDS w 1 m w 0.4 m w 0.8 m
∅ 4.2
∅ 50+0.2
1+0.2
Figure 4-5 Dimensions of the MDS F125
Field data
Dimensions
(in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-9
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Metal
Non-metal
Data memory
h > 50 mm
Mounting on metal
Flush installation of the MDS in metal is not permitted in
combination with SLG 80/SIM 80!
Figure 4-6 Metal-free space for the MDS F125
Note
Underranging the guideline values (h) will significantly decrease the field
data. See chap. 3.4.2. Mounting of the MDS with metal screws (M4 screw)
is possible. This does not noticeably reduce its range.
A test is recommended for critical applications.
For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information
in chapter 3.4.2.
Metal-free space
Mobile Data Memories
4-10 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
4.4 MDS F160
The MDS F160 mobile data memory was especially developed for rugged
use by laundries and cleaners. A laundry tag with a limited life is available
for cyclic applications.
Primary uses:
SRental work clothes
SSurgical textiles, hospital clothes
SHotel laundry
SRental laundry
SMats
Figure 4-7 MDS F160
Table 4-9 Ordering data for MDS F160
Ordering Data
Mobile data memory MDS F160
40-bit fixed code
6GT2 400-1GA00
Table 4-10 Technical data for MDS F160
Memory size 40 bits (ID number)
Memory organization Fixed code
Multi-tag capability No
Read cycles Unlimited
Read distance See field data.
Direction dependency No
Mounting of the MDS Glued, patch, sewn in
Protection rating IP68 (20° C, 24 hours, 2 m)
Physical design Pressed, shock resistant plastic
Color Black
Material Epoxy resin
Dimensions (D x H) in mm ∅16 x 3
Application
area
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-11
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 4-10 Technical data for MDS F160
Physical resistance
Isostatic pressure 300 bar for 5 minutes
Axial pressure 800 N
Radial pressure 800 N
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25 °C to +85 °C
–25 °C to +100 °C for 1000 hours
+160 °C for 10 hours
Resistance to chemicals All chemicals conventionally used in the
laundry process
Washing cycles, min. 200
Weight, approx. 1.2 g
Note
The MDS F160 must be given a regeneration time of at least 24 hours
between laundry cycles.
Table 4-11 Field data for MDS F160
SLG 80/
SIM 80 ANT
F51
SLG 82/
SIM 82/
SLA 81
SLA 82
Working distance (Sa)0 to 140 mm 0 to 60 mm 0 to 90 mm
Limit distance (Sg)160 mm 70 mm 120 mm
Transmission window (L) 230 mm ∅ 40 mm ∅ 120 mm
Minimum distance from
MDS to MDS w 1 m w 0.3 m w 0.6 m
1 When the MDS F160 is combined with the SLG/SIM 80 ANT F5, a mounting plate of
metal at a distance of 100 mm to the antenna (ANT F5) must always be used since other-
wise there would be no communication or poor communication.
∅ 16"0.1 3"0.1
SIEMENS
6GT2 400-1GA00
MDS F160
MOBY F
Figure 4-8 Dimensions of the MDS F160
Field data
Dimension (in mm)
Mobile Data Memories
4-12 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Metal
Non metal
Data memory
Mounting on metal
Flush installation of the MDS in metal is not permitted in
combination with SLG 80/SIM 80!
h ≥ 20 mm
Figure 4-9 Metal-free space for the MDS F160
Note
Any type of metal (particularly iron and ferromagnetic material) in the vicin-
ity of the MDS and SLG/SIM antennas will affect their functions. The dis-
tances to metal described above must be adhered to. Non-adherence to the
metal-free space will reduce the limit and working distances.
For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information
in chapter 3.4.2.
Metal-free space
Mobile Data Memories
4-13
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
4.5 MDS F415
Figure 4-10 MDS F415
Table 4-12 Ordering data for MDS F415
Order No.
MDS F415 mobile data memory
with 256-byte EEPROM1
6GT2 400-4BF00
1 192-byte EEPROM can be used with SLG. 224-byte EEPROM can be used with SIM.
Table 4-13 Technical data of MDS F415
Memory size 256 bytes 1
Memory organization Random access
Multi-tag capability Yes 2
MTBF 2.5 x 106 hours
Read cycles Unlimited
Write cycles, minimum 200 000
Write cycles, typical (v + 40°C) u 1 000 000
Read/write distance See field data.
Vibration 20 g
Shock 100 g
Torsion and bending stress Not permitted
Direction dependency No
Securing of MDS Adhesive, M4 screw
Turning moment at + 20° C v 1Nm
Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529 IP67
Physical design Pressed, impact-proof epoxide
material
Ordering data
Technical data
Mobile Data Memories
4-14 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 4-13 Technical data of MDS F415
Color Black
Material Epoxide material
Dimensions (D x H) in mm ∅50 x 1
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25° to +100° C
–40° to +130° C
Weight (approx.) 5 g
1 192-EEPROM can be used with SLG. 224-byte EEPROM can be used with SIM. See
chap. 6.8 on the data structure of the MOBY F data memory MDS F4xx.
2 Only in combination with SIM 80 ANT F5
Table 4-14 Memory organization of the MDS F4xx1
Address in Memory Description
0 to 3 Serial number, fixed code; can be read with SLG/SIM
4 to 15 Configuration and key; only possible with SIM 80 ANT F5
16 to 31 Password assignment; only possible with SIM 80 ANT F5
32 to 63 User data; only possible with SIM 80 ANT F5
64 to 127 Read/write memory for use as desired; for user data with SLG/
SIM; this area can be configured (password assignment) when
SIM 80 ANT F5 is used.
128 to 255 Read/write memory for use as desired; for user data with SLG/
SIM; this area cannot be configured.
1 See chap. 6.8 on the data structure of the MOBY F data memory MDS F4xx.
Table 4-15 Field data of MDS F415
SLG 80/
SIM 80 ANT F5
SLG 82/
SIM 82/
SLA 81
SLA 82
Operating distance (Sa)0 to 300 mm 15 to 90 mm 20 to 150 mm
Limit distance (Sg)340 mm 110 mm 180 mm
Transmission window (L) 280 mm ∅ 70 mm ∅ 120 mm
Minimum distance from
MDS to MDS w 1 m 1w 1 m w 1 m
1 The minimum distance can be reduced with SIM 80 ANT F5 during multi-tag opera-
tion. The MDSs can be located next to each other. MDS overlapping is not permitted.
Memory organiza-
tion of MDS F4xx
Field data
Mobile Data Memories
4-15
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
∅ 4.2
∅ 50+0.2
1+0.2
Figure 4-11 Dimensions of the MDS F415
Metal
Non-metal
Data memory
h > 50 mm
Mounting on metal
Flush installation of the MDS in metal is not permitted in
combination with SLG 80/SIM 80!
Figure 4-12 Metal-free space for the MDS F415
Note
Underranging the guideline values (h) will significantly decrease the field
data. See chap. 3.4.2. Mounting of the MDS with metal screws (M4 screw)
is possible. This does not noticeably reduce its range.
A test is recommended for critical applications.
For installation in metallic environment, read and adhere to the information
in chapter 3.4.2.
Dimensions
(in mm)
Metal-free space
Mobile Data Memories
4-16 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Mobile Data Memories
5-1
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Read/Write Devices
Read/Write Antennas 5
5-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
5.1 Introduction
In combination with the interface module (i.e., ASM), the read/write device (i.e.,
SLG/SLA) represents the communications interface between a host controller
and the mobile data memory (i.e., MDS). The SLG/SLA permits inductive
communication with the MDS. The data read from the MDS and the operations
to be executed on the MDS are transferred via the serial link to/from the ASM.
.A read/write device is the inductive counterpart to a mobile data memory.
SAntenna – transmission of the power field and data signals to and from
the MDS
SLogic – A/D-D/A conversion of the MDS/ASM signals
SCommunications unit – reliable transmission of data and commands to
and from the ASM
SHousing – reliable protection against environmental conditions
The read/write device (SLG/SLA) receives commands and data from the in-
terface module (ASM) via the serial interface. These commands and data are
converted into instructions which trigger operations on the mobile data
memory. Powering and communication with the MDS are performed via
inductive alternating fields. The information transmitted by the MDS is re-
turned to the ASM via the serial interface.
The amount of information which can be transmitted between SLG/SLA and
MDS depends on the following factors.
SSpeed at which the MDS moves past the antenna (so-called crossing win-
dow)
SLength of the inductive alternating field of the SLG/SLA through which
the MDS moves (so-called transmission window)
Table 5-1 Overview table, SLG/SLA
SLG Type Operating
Distance Sa
(Depending
on MDS)
Limit
Distance Sg
(Depending on
MDS)
Temperature
Range
(During
Operation)
SLG
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
in mm
Antenna
Dimensions
(L x W x H)
in mm
Protec-
tion
Rating
SLG 80 ANT F5 0 to 380 mm Max. of 420 mm –25 to +60 °C320 x 145 x 100 350 x 350 x 20 IP65
SLG 82 0 to 110 mm Max. of 140 mm –25 to +55 °C205 x 130 x 60 ∅ 65 x 90 IP40
SLA 81 0 to 110 mm Max. of 140 mm –25 to +70 °C – ∅ 65 x 90 IP65
SLA 82 0 to 180 mm Max. of 200 mm –25 to +70 °C – 150 x 150 x 30 IP65
Definition of IP65
- Protection against penetration of dust
(i.e., dust-proof)
- Full protection against touch
- Protection against water jet
Definition of IP40
- Protection against penetration of solid foreign bodies
with ∅≥ 1.0 mm
- Protection against touching dangerous parts with wire
- Not protected against penetration by water
Application area
Layout and
functions
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-3
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
5.2 SLG 80 ANT F5
The SLG 80 with ANT F5 is designed for applications requiring long operat-
ing distances to the MDS. In dynamic operation, the size of the transmission
window generated by the ANT F5 permits high crossing speeds.
Figure 5-1 Read/write device SLG 80 ANT F5
Table 5-2 Ordering data for the SLG 80 ANT F5
Read/write device SLG 80 ANT F5 6GT2 401-0AF00
Stub lines and accessories See chapter 3.7.
Table 5-3 Technical data of SLG 80 ANT F5
Inductive interface to MDS
Max. read distances, SLG-MDS F1xx 420 mm r/o
(see field data, chap. 3.2)
Max. read/write distances, SLG-MDS F4xx 340 mm, r/w
Transmission frequency 125 kHz
Serial interface to ASM RS 422
Data transmission speed 9600 baud
Data line length (max.) 1000 m
Line length, antenna (See caution note.) 2 m (can be connected on the SLG
side)
Supply voltage 1
(via separate power plug connector)
Nominal value
Permissible range
24 V DC, linear regulated power
pack or clock-pulsed switching
power pack (160 to 200 kHz)
20 to 30 V DC
Application area
Ordering data
Technical data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-4 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 5-3 Technical data of SLG 80 ANT F5
Current consumption at room temperature
Switchon current, brief
Operation (at 24 V)
Max. of 1.5 A
600 mA (typical)
MTBF 1 x 105 hours
Housing
Dimensions (in mm)
For antenna head (L x W x H)
For electronics w/o plug (L x W x H)
Color Antenna
SLG housing
Material Antenna
SLG housing
Plug connection (data)
Plug connection (counter plug for voltage
supply; is included with the SLG.)
350 x 350 x 20
320 x 145 x 100
Anthracite
Anthracite
Aluminum
Aluminum
9-pole submin plug connector
(pin on device side)
M12 4-pole device plug connector
(IP65)
Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529
SLG housing
Antenna
Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2
Total shock-response spectrum, type II
Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2
IP652
IP65
30 g
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Mounting of SLG
Mounting of antenna
Turning moment (at room temperature)
4 M6 screws
Min. of 4 M6 screws
v3 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25° to +60° C
–40° to +85° C
Weight (SLG) Approx. 3600 g
Weight (antenna) Approx. 1200 g
1 SLG power supply cannot be connected via the ASM.
2 IP65 only with special plug 6GT2 490-1AA00 (see chap. 3.7.2).
!Caution
The antenna cable is prefabricated. Modification of the cable will invalidate
the warranty and CE/BZT certification.
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-5
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 5-4 Field data of SLG 80 ANT F5
Operating distance (Sa)
Limit distance (Sg)
Transmission window (L)
Minimum distance from ANT F5 to ANT F5 (D)
0 to 380 mm (See table 3-4.)
420 mm (See table 3-4.)
280 mm (See table 3-4.)
See figure 5-4.
!Warning
Do not make changes on the devices.
Violation will invalidate interference emission certification (FCC) and the
manufacturer ’s warranty.
Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
SReorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
SIncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver.
SConnect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
SConsult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
!Caution
Use of a shielded cable for any kind of connection cable is absolutely
necessary.
The cable shield must be secured with a shield clamp directly on the inter-
face module and grounded via a grounding rail.
Field data
FCC information
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-6 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
Sg
View of side
Transmission window MDS
View of top
SLG 80 ANT F5
Sa
L
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
Metal plate (spacing kit)
Figure 5-2 Transmission window of the SLG 80 ANT F5
Metal-free space with flush installation
a = 100 mm
a
Metal
a
a
a
h = 100 mm (non-metallic spacer holder)
Figure 5-3 Metal-free space for SLG 80 ANT F5
Transmission
window
Metal-free space
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-7
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Da
Db
SLG 80
ANT F5
SLG 80
ANT F5
SLG 80
ANT F5
Da ≥ 1.5 m (for MDS F1xx)/≥ 5 m (for MDS F4xx)
Db ≥ 1.5 m (for MDS F1xx)/≥ 5 m (for MDS F4xx)
Figure 5-4 Distance D for SLG 80 ANT F5
Definition of
distance D
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-8 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions
Minimum
bending radius:
20 mm
Cable length
2 m
350
145
320
10
7
125
12
7
280
280
A
View A
100
25
52.5
Note
The SLG must be grounded on the grounding screw1 provided.
1
290
40
25
20
140
Figure 5-5 Dimensional diagram of SLG 80 ANT F5
Note
To ensure optimal field data even in a metallic environment, the ANT F5 is
calibrated at the plant to a distance of 100 mm to metal.
Dimensions
(in mm)
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-9
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 5-5 Ordering data for spacer kit MOBY F ANT F5
Order No.
Spacer kit for ANT F5 of aluminum with plastic spacers
incl. mounting screws
6GT2 690-0AB00
Single Parts Quantity
Aluminum plate, 380 x 380 x 2 1
Plastic bolts, 100 x 20 4
Countersunk screws, M5 x 12 4
Pan head screws, M5 x 20 4
Washer for M5 4
Spring ring for M5 4
380
340
300
280
∅6∅9
ÓÓÓÓ
∅20100
M5 x 20
Aluminum plate:
Plastic bolts:
T = 2
R10
Figure 5-6 Dimensional drawing of the spacer kit for MOBY F ANT F5
Spacer kit for
MOBY F ANT F5
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-10 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
4
5
6
2
1
3
Holes for ANT F5
Figure 5-7 Installation drawing for spacer kit
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-11
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
5.3 SLG 82 Basic Device
The SLG 82 is a basic middle-of-the-line device.
The SLA 81 and SLA 82 can be connected as antennas. These are not included
with the SLG basic device.
The maximum length of the line between antenna and evaluation unit is 55 m.
The 5-m connection cable from the antenna to the evaluation unit is not included
with the SLG 82 basic device.
Figure 5-8 Read/write, SLG 82 basic device
Table 5-6 Ordering data for the SLG 82 basic device
Read/write SLG 82 basic device
with serial interface RS 422, for SLA 81 or
SLA 82 (SLA not included)
To be operated on the following interfaces:
ASM 400, ASM 410, ASM 450, ASM 452,
ASM 470, ASM 473 and ASM 475
6GT2 499-1BC00
Accessories:
Wide-range power pack, 100 to 230 V AC/
24 V DC, 2.2 A (without 24 V stub line)
Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting
Stub lines and accessories
6GT2 494-0AA00
6GT2 390-0BA00
See chap. 3.7.
Application area
Ordering data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-12 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 5-7 Technical data of the SLG 82 basic device
Inductive interface to the MDS
Read/write distances between SLG and
MDS, max.
Varies with antenna (see field data)
Transmission frequency 125 kHz
Serial interface to the ASM RS 422
Data transmission rate 9600 Baud
Data line length to the ASM, max. 1000 m
Line length to antenna Max. of 55 mm
(can be connected on both sides)
Supply voltage
Nominal value
Permissible range
Via separate power plug (not included,
see accessories)
24 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Power-on current, brief
Operation (at 24 V DC)
Max. of 1.1 A
250 mA, typical
MTBF (at +40 °C) 1 x 105 hours
Housing
Dimensions (in mm)
Electronics without plug (L x W x H)
Color
Material
Plug connection
Data (RS 422)
Electronics ↔ antenna
Supply voltage
205 x 130 x 60
Anthracite
Aluminum
9-pin, submin D plug
(pins on device side)
9-pin submin D plug
(socket on device side)
4-pin M12 on SLG housing (pin)
Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529
Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
Total shock-response spectrum, type II
Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/
class 7M2
IP40 (higher protection ratings on
request)
30 g
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Mounting of the SLG
Tightening moment at 20 °C
4 M5 screws
≤ 3 Nm
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transportation and storage
–25°C to +55°C
(no condensation)
–40°C to +85°C
(no condensation)
Weight (without connection cable) 1300 g
Technical data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-13
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
An SLA 81 or SLA 82 can be connected to the SLG 82 basic device.
RxD PRE ERR
RxD:
PRE:
ERR:
SLG with command active
“Presence” shows the presence of an MDS in the transmission
window (only valid when a command is queued).
Error indication with flashing LED
Plugs to the SLA
Socket Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+ 6.6 V
+ Send
+ Receive
CLK +
– Receive
– Send
Ground (0 V)
+ 24 V
CLK –
Housing Cable shield
Flashing of the ERR-LED
1x
3x
6x
20x
Meaning
Startup message (flashes once during startup)
Connection error or field interference
Calibration error
Hardware error
Figure 5-9 Serial interface of the SLG 82 basic device to the SLA
SERIAL DC 24 V
ON
1234 67 9 11121085
ON: 24 V are present
(green) on the SLG/SIM.
SF/BF: System fault,
(red) fault RAM error
ACT: This LED is on
(green) while a command
is being processed.
Pin Designation
SF/BF
ON ACT
1
2
3
4
Ground
+ 24 V
Ground
+ 24 V
SERIAL
Pins RS 232
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Free
Free
Free
Free
TxD (send)
RxD (receive)
Ground (0 V)
Free
Free
24 V DC
Switches 1 to 7: Reserved
Switch 8: Interface setting
ON: RS 422 (operation)
OFF: RS 232 (only for download)
Switch 9: MDS parameterization
ON: MDS F1xx (r/o)
OFF: MDS F4xx (r/w)
Switch 10: Firmware download
ON: Download
OFF: Operation
Switches 11, 12: Free
1
2
34
RS 422
+RxD
+TxD
Free
–TxD
–RxD
Ground (0 V)
Free
Housing Cable shield
1
1 Interface RS 232 only for download
Cable shield
Cable shield
Cable shield
Figure 5-10 Serial interfaces of the SLG 82 basic device to the user
Pin allocations
and switches
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-14 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
130
205
Grounding
bolts M4
Figure 5-11 Dimensional drawing of SLG 82 basic device without mounting holes
3
4
5
1
2
Item Designation Quantity
1 Floor plate 1
2 Profile section 1
3 Oval head screw
(M5 x 10)
4
4 Washer (A5.3) 4
5 Countersunk
screw (M4 x 10)
2
Figure 5-12 Mounting drawing of the adapter floor plate
Note
The profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90° on the floor plate to adjust
to the concrete mounting conditions.
Dimensions
(in mm)
Adapter floor plate
for top hat rail
mounting
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-15
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
5.4 SLG 82
The SLG 82 is a medium-end, read/write device with a remote antenna. The
cable between antenna and evaluation unit may be up to 55 m in length.
The antenna head can be positioned very precisely for every application with
two screw nuts.
Mixed operation in systems with the SLG 80 is possible (but without DSP/
FFT command).
The connection cable from the antenna to the evaluation unit is included with
the SLG 82 (length: 5 m).
Figure 5-13 Read/write device SLG 82
Table 5-8 Ordering data of the SLG 82
SLG 82 read/write device
with serial interface RS 422 and an SLA 81
6GT2 401-2CB00
Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting for
SLG 82
6GT2 390-0BA00
Stub lines and accessories See chap. 3.7.
Table 5-9 Technical data of the SLG 82
Inductive interface to the MDS
Max. SLG-MDS read/write distances 140 mm (see field data)
Transmission frequency 125 kHz
Serial interface to the ASM RS 422
Data transmission speed 9600 baud
Data line length to ASM (max.) 1000 m
Line length to the antenna Max. of 55 m (can be plugged on both
sides)
Application area
Ordering data
Technical data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-16 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 5-9 Technical data of the SLG 82
Voltage supply
Nominal value
Permissible range
With separate power plug (not included
with the SLG 82)
24 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Switch-on current (brief)
Operation (at 24 V DC)
Max. of 1.1 A
250 mA (typical)
MTBF (at +40° C) 1 x 105 hours
Housing
Dimensions (in mm)
Antenna with threading and plug
(∅ x L)
Threading on plug side
(∅ x incline x L)
Electronics without plug (L x W x H)
Color (antenna)
(SLG housing)
Material (antenna)
(SLG-Gehäuse)
Plug connection
Data (RS 422)
Electronics ↔ antenna
Voltage supply
65 x 90
M30 x 1.5 x 40
205 x 130 x 60
Anthracite/pastel turquoise
Anthracite
Krastin
Aluminum
9-pole, submin. D plug
(pins on device side)
9-pole, submin. D plug
(socket on device side)
4-pole, M12 on SLG housing (pin)
Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529
SLG housing
Antenna
Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
Total shock-response range, type II
Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/
class 7M2
IP40 (higher protection rating on re-
quest)
IP65
30 g
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Mounting of SLG
Tightening moment at 20° C
Mounting of antenna
4 M5 screws
v3 Nm
2 plastic nuts (M30 x 1.5)
Ambient temperature
Antenna Operation
Transportation and storage
SLG housing Operation
Transportation and storage
–25° C to +70° C
–40° C to +85° C
–25° C to +55° C
(no condensation)
–40° C to +85° C
(no condensation)
Weight (without connection cable)
SLG
Antenna
1300 g
150 g
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-17
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 5-10 Field data of SLG 82
Working distance (Sa)
Limit distance (Sg)
Diameter of transmission window (Ld)
Minimum distance from SLA to SLA (D)
0 to 110 mm
140 mm
70 mm
See figure 5-16.
View of top
View of side
Transmission window
Ld
sg
sa
Ld
Figure 5-14 Transmission window of SLG 82 with SLA 81
MOBY F
20
View of side
20
40
View of top
Note:
Non-adherence to metal-free space will reduce limit
and working distances.
SLA 81
6GT2 401-2BB00
Metal-free space
with flush installa-
tion
Figure 5-15 Metal-free space for SLG 82 with SLA 81
Field data
Transmission
window
Metal-free space
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-18 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Da w 400 mm (for MDS F1xx) / w 1.2 m (for MDS F4xx)
Db w 800 mm (for MDS F1xx) / w 2.4 m (for MDS F4xx)
Db
Da
SLA 81 SLA 81
SLA 81
Figure 5-16 Distance D: SLG 82
RxD
PRE ERR
RxD: SLG active with command
PRE: Presence indicates the presence of an MDS in the transmission window
(only valid when a command is queued).
ERR: Error indicated by flashing LED
Plug connector to SLA
Socket Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+ 6.6 V
+ Send
+ Receive
CLK +
– Receive
– Send
Ground (0 V)
+ 24 V
CLK –
Hous. Cable shield
Flashing
of the
ERR-LED
1x
3x
6x
20x
Meaning
The SLG has started up and still has not received a RESET from the ASM.
The connection between SLG and ASM has malfunctioned.
The SLA 81/SLA 82 is malfunctioning (positioned incorrectly or defective).
Hardware error: Turn SLG off/on.
If error continues to occur ⇒ SLG is defective.
Figure 5-17 Serial interface of SLG 82 to SLA 81
Definition of
distance D
Pin allocations
and switches
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-19
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
SERIAL DC 24 V
ON
1234 67 9 11121085
ON: 24 V present
(green) on SLG
SF/BF: System fault/
(red) bus fault,
RAM fault
ACT: This LED goes
(green) on while a
command is
being executed.
Pin Designation
SF/BF ON ACT
1
2
3
4
Ground
+ 24 V
Ground
+ 24 V
SERIAL
Pins RS 232
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
TxD (send)
RxD (receive)
Ground (0 V)
Not used
Not used
24 V DC
Switches 1 to 7: Reserved
Switch 8: Interface setting
ON: RS 422 (operation)
OFF: RS 232 (only for download)
Switch 9: MDS parameterization
ON: MDS 1xx (r/o)
OFF: MDS 4xx (r/w)
Switch 10: Firmware download
ON: Download
OFF: Operation
Switch 11, 12: Not used
1
2
34
RS 422
+RxD
+TxD
Cable shield
Not used
–TxD
–RxD
Ground (0 V)
Cable shield
Not used
Hous. Cable shield Cable shield
1
1 RS 232 interface only for download
Figure 5-18 Serial interface of SLG 82 to user
130
205
Grounding
bolt, M4
Figure 5-19 Drawing of SLG 82’s housing
Dimensions
(in mm)
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-20 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Antenna side
Mounting nuts
8-pole pin plug (M12)
∅ 65
Threading
M30 x 1.5
25
12
40
90
∅ 34
Figure 5-20 Drawing of antenna for SLG 82 (SLA 81)
3
4
5
1
2
Item Designation Quantity
1 Floor plate 1
2 Profile section 1
3 Oval head screw
(M5 x 10)
4
4 Washer (A5.3) 4
5 Countersunk
screw (M4 x 10)
2
Figure 5-21 Drawing of mounting of adapter floor plate
Note
The profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90° and mounted to allow for
adjustment to the actual situation.
Adapter floor plate
for top hat rail
mounting
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-21
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
5.5 SLA 81
The SLA 81 is a read/write device in the medium performance range. It per-
mits greater distances to the evaluation unit (SLG, SIM or ASM).
The cable between antenna and evaluation unit may be up to 55 m in length.
The antenna head can be positioned very precisely for every application with
two screw nuts.
The SLA 81 is used with the following components: SLG 82, SIM 82,
ASM 824, ASM 850 and ASM 854.
Figure 5-22 Read/write device SLA 81
Table 5-11 Ordering data of the SLA 81
SLA 81 read/write antenna 6GT2 401-2BB00
Mounting clamp for SLA 81 3SX6 284
Stub lines and accessories See chap. 3.7.
Table 5-12 Technical data of the SLA 81
Inductive interface to the MDS
Max. SLG/SIM/ASM-MDS read/write distances 140 mm (see field data)
Transmission frequency 125 kHz
Serial interface to the evaluation unit RS 422
Data transmission speed (SLA – evaluation unit) 2 kbaud (gross)
Data line length to SLG/SIM/ASM (max.) 55 m
Application area
Ordering data
Technical data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-22 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 5-12 Technical data of the SLA 81
Voltage supply (only via evaluation unit) 6.6 V DC
Current consumption at room temperature 180 mA (typical)
Antenna
Dimensions (in mm)
Antenna with threading and plug
(∅ x L)
Threading on plug side
(∅ x incline x L)
Color
Material
Plug connection
Standard connection cable to evaluation unit
65 x 90
M30 x 1.5 x 40
Pastel turquoise
Krastin
8-pole M12 plug
(pin on device side)
5 m
Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529
Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
Total shock-response range, type II
Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
IP65
30 g
2 g (3 to 200 Hz)
5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Mounting of SLA 81 2 plastic nuts (M30 x 1.5)
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transportation and storage
–25° C to +70° C
–40° C to +85° C
Weight (without connection cable) 150 g
Table 5-13 Field data of SLA 81
Working distance (Sa)
Limit distance (Sg)
Diameter of transmission window (Ld)
Minimum distance from SLA to SLA (D)
0 to 110 mm
140 mm
70 mm
See figure 5-25
Field data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-23
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
View of top
View of side
Transmission window
Ld
sg
sa
Ld
Figure 5-23 Transmission window of SLA 81
MOBY F
20
View of side
20
40
View of top
Note:
Non-adherence to metal-free space will reduce limit
and working distances.
SLA 81
6GT2 401-2BB00
Metal-free space
with flush installa-
tion
Figure 5-24 Metal-free space for SLA 81
Transmission
window
Metal-free space
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-24 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Da w 400 mm (for MDS F1xx) / w 1.2 m (for MDS F4xx)
Db w 800 mm (for MDS F1xx) / w 2.4 m (for MDS F4xx)
Db
Da
SLA 81 SLA 81
SLA 81
Figure 5-25 Distance D: SLA 81
Antenna side
Mounting nuts
8-pole pin plug (M12)
∅ 65
Threading
(M30 x 1.5)
25
12
40
90
∅ 34
Figure 5-26 Dimensional drawing of SLA 81
Definition of
distance D
Dimensions
(in mm)
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-25
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
30
29
36
58
18
5
5
19.5
30
42.5
Figure 5-27 Dimensional drawing of the mounting clamp
Figure 5-28 Drawing of mounting of SLA 81 with mounting clamp
Optional mounting
clamp
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-26 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
5.6 SLA 82
The SLA 82 is a middle-of-the-line read/write antenna. It permits a greater
distance to the evaluation unit (SLG, SIM or ASM).
The maximum line length between antenna and evaluation unit is 55 m.
The SLG 82 can be connected to the following components: SLG 82 basic
device, SIM 82, ASM 824, ASM 850 and ASM 854.
Figure 5-29 SLA 82 read/write antenna
Table 5-14 Ordering data of the SLA 82
SLA 82 read/write antenna 6GT2 401-2AA00
Stub lines and accessories See chap. 3.7.
Table 5-15 Technical data of the SLA 82
Inductive interface to the MDS
Max. read/write distances between SLG and MDS 200 mm (see field data)
Transmission frequency 125 kHz
Serial interface to the evaluation unit RS 422
Data transmission rate (SLA – evaluation unit) 2 kBaud (gross)
Max. data line length to the ASM 55 m
Supply voltage
(only via evaluation unit)
Current consumption at room temperature
6.6 V DC
180 mA, typical
Application area
Ordering data
Technical data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-27
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 5-15 Technical data of the SLA 82
Antenna
Dimensions without plug (L x W x H in mm)
Color
Material
Plug connection
Standard connection cable to the evaluation unit
(see accessories)
150 x 150 x 30
Anthracite
Plastic, PA 12
8-pin, M12 plug
(pin on the device side)
5 m
Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529
Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
Total shock-response spectrum, type II
Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
IP65
30 g
2 g (3 to 200 Hz)
5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Mounting of the SLA 82 2 M6 screws
Ambient temperature
Operation
Transportation and storage
–25 °C to +70 °C
–40 °C to +85 °C
Weight without connection cable, approx. 500 g
Table 5-16 Field data of the SLA 82
Working distance (Sa)
Limit distance (Sg)
Diameter of the transmission field (Ld)
Minimum distance from SLA to SLA (D)
0 to 180 mm
200 mm
120 mm
See figure 5-32.
Field data
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-28 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
SgSide view
Transmission window MDS
View of top
SLA 82
Sa
1 The transmission window may
increase when Sa, min.
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
L (Sa,min) 1
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
L (Sa,max) = Ld
Figure showing principle
Figure 5-30 Transmission window of the SLA 82
Metal-free space with flush mounting
a = 50 mm
a
Metal
a
a
a
H = 30 mm (non-metallic surface)
Figure 5-31 Metal-free area of SLA 82
Transmission
window
Metal-free space
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-29
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
SLA 82
D ≥ 1.2 m for MDS F1xx
D ≥ 2.5 m for MDS F4xx
SLA 82
SLA 82
D
D
Figure 5-32 Distance D: SLA 82
30
∅ 6.5
130
20
150
20
10
150
130
8-pin, M12 pin plug
Figure 5-33 Dimensional drawing of SLA 82
Definition of the
distance D
Dimensions
(in mm)
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
5-30 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Read/Write Devices – Read/Write Antennas
6-1
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Interfaces 6
6-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6.1 Introduction
ASM interfaces provide the link between MOBY E components (i.e., SLG/
SLA/MDS) and higher level controllers (e.g., SIMATIC S5/S7), PCs or com-
puters. Up to four SLGs/SLAs can be connected depending on the interface
used.
An ASM consists of a microcontroller system with its own program stored on
a PROM. The CPU receives commands via the user interface and stores
these in the RAM. The user receives an acknowledgment that the command
has arrived. When the command is correct, the CPU begins execution.
Table 6-1 Overview of the interfaces
ASM
Type
Interfaces to
PC/Computer
Interfa-
ces to
SLG/
SLA
Function
Blocks
SLG/
SLA
Connec-
tions
Dimensions
(WxHxD in
mm)
Temperature
Range (During
Operation)
Protec-
tion
Rating
ASM 400 Can be
installed in
S5-115-155U
9-pole
sub D
socket
FB 250/230/
252
1 per CM
4 per
ASM
0° to + 55° C IP00
ASM 410 Can be
installed in
S5-100U/
ET 200U
Can be
connec-
ted via
bus mo-
dule
2 (multi-
plex)
45 x 135 x 100 0° to + 60° C IP20
ASM 450 To
PROFIBUS DP
(screw
connection)
2x5-pole
prox.
switch
plug con-
nectors
FC 45
FC 46
FB 240
2 (multi-
plex)
134 x 110 x 55 0° to + 55° C IP65
ASM 452 PROFIBUS
DPV1
2x5-pole
prox.
switch
plug
FC 45 2 (quasi-
parallel)
134 x 110 x 55 0° to +55 °C IP67
ASM 470 Can be
installed in
S7-300/
ET 200M
Via
screw ter-
minals
FC 47
FB 47
2 (multi-
plex)
45 x 125 x 120 0° to + 60° C IP20
ASM 473 Can be plugged
into ET 200X
2x5-pole
prox.
switch
plug
FC 45 187 x 110 x 55 0° to +55° C IP67
ASM 475 Can be plugged
into S7-300/
ET 200M
via
screw–
type ter-
minals
FC 45 2
(parallel)
40 x 125 x 120 0° to +60 °C IP20
ASM 824 RS 232/422
9-pole sub D
socket
9-pole
sub D
socket
MOBY API
(DLL)
4 x
SLA 8x
(parallel)
205 x 130 x 60 –25° to +55° C IP40
Application area
Layout and func-
tions
Overview
Interfaces
6-3
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-1 Overview of the interfaces
ASM
Type
Protec-
tion
Rating
Temperature
Range (During
Operation)
Dimensions
(WxHxD in
mm)
SLG/
SLA
Connec-
tions
Function
Blocks
Interfa-
ces to
SLG/
SLA
Interfaces to
PC/Computer
ASM 850 PROFIBUS
DPV1
9-pole sub D
socket
9-pole
sub D
socket
FC 45 1 x
SLA 8x
205 x 130 x 60 –25° to +55° C IP40
ASM 854 PROFIBUS
DPV1
9-pole sub D
socket
9-pole
sub D
socket
FC 45 4 x
SLA 8x
(parallel)
205 x 130 x 60 –25° to +55° C IP40
SIM 80
ANT F5
RS 232
9-pole
sub D plug
connector
Integra-
ted
C-Lib
(DLL)
–320 x 145 x 100
350 x 350 x 20
–25° to + 60° C IP65
SIM 82 RS 232/422
9-pole sub D
socket
9-pole
sub D
socket
C-Lib
(DLL)
1 x
SLA 8x
205 x 130 x 60 –25° to +55° C IP40
Interfaces
6-4 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6.2 ASM 400
6.2.1 Overview
ASM 400 interfaces can be directly installed and operated in the following
SIMATIC S5 programmable controllers.
SS5-155U/F (all CPUs)
SS5-135U (all CPUs)
SS5-155U/H (all CPUs)
ASM 400 interfaces consist of the basic module in double Europe format and
the CM 422 channel submodule. The basic module can be equipped with one
to four channel submodules. Mixed configuration is not permitted.
The ASM 400 with the CM 422 operates in the I/O area of the SIMATIC S5.
When used with function block FB 250, up to 32 channel submodules (i.e.,
eight 4-channel interfaces) can be operated in one SIMATIC. When FB 252
is used, the maximum number of channel submodules is increased from
32 to 96 per SIMATIC S5. All MDS models can be processed via the FBs.
The user addresses the data on the MDS via a command table in the data
block. The user addresses user data via absolute addresses.
SLG SLG SLG SLG
MDS MDSMDS MDS
SIEMENS
MOBY F
SIEMENS
MOBY F
SIEMENS
MOBY F
SIEMENS
MOBY F
24V 24V 24V 24V
ASM 400
with channel submodule
CM 422
STG
Figure 6-1 Configurator of ASM 400
Application area
Layout and
function
Interfaces
6-5
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Communication time between ASM 400 and user depends on two factors.
SCycle time and type of programmable controller
SSoftware used (i.e., FB 250)
Communication between ASM 400 and user can be divided into three steps.
SThe user issues a command and starts it. The next time the FB is called,
the command is transferred to the ASM and acknowledged by the ASM.
SThe ASM executes the command with the MDS. The user and the FB are
in wait status. Data communication with the MDS begins as soon as an
MDS enters the transmission window of the SLG. The MDS data are
stored intermediately on the ASM and checked for correctness.
SASM communication with the MDS is concluded. When the FB is called
the next time, the data which have been read or written are transferred
from the ASM to the user. The user receives a finished message.
Table 6-2 Ordering data of ASM 400
Order No.
ASM 400 interface
consisting of basic module and CM 422
channel module
Basic module with connection to STG,
with 4 slide-in slots for CM 422 channel
module, without channel module
6GT2 002-0AA00
CM 422 channel module for an
ASM 400, with connection for 1 SLG
6GT2 002-0AB00
MOBY software1
Plug,
ASM-side, 9-pole, submin D plug (pins)
with screw lock for stub line between an
ASM 400 and SLG
S1 each
S1 package (10 each)
Stub lines and accessories
6GT2 080-2AA10
6GT2 090-0BB00
6GT2 090-0BB10
See chapter 3.7.
Description of ASM 400/401
German
English
Description of FB 250 for ASM 400
German
English
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See chapter 7.1.
Communication
between ASM 400
and user program
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-6 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-3 Technical data of ASM 400
Channel Submodule CM 422
Serial interface to SLG
Plug connector
Max. interface/line length
connectable SLG
RS 422
9-pole sub D socket
RS 422/1000 m, depending on SLG type
1 SLG for each CM
Software functions
Programming With STEP 5 function block FB 250
Commands Read data, write data, initialize MD
Access directly via addresses
Supply voltage DC 5/24 V via internal bus
Interfaces ASM 400
Interfaces for CM/SLG
ASM 400 (max.)
Interface to STG 4F
Interface for 24 V DC
4 CM 422
RS 422, 9-pole sub D socket
2-pole plug connector (included)
Supply voltage1
Nominal value
Permissible range
Internal (at 5 V)
External (at 24 V)
5/24 V DC
4.75 to 5.25 V DC
Not required
Current consumption (max.)
Internal (at 5 V) 1 channel
2 channels
3 channels
4 channels
370 mA
490 mA
610 mA
730 mA
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and
storage
Rel. humidity at 25° C
Space requirements
Weight (approx.)
ASM 400
CM 422
0° to +55° C
–20° to +70° C
< 95%
1 SEP (1 SEP = 15.24 mm)
0.44 kg
0.1 kg
1 With MOBY F, the voltage for the SLG cannot be connected via the ASM.
Technical data
Interfaces
6-7
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Function block FB 250 controls data transmission between the STEP5 pro-
gram and the ASM 400 interface module.
FB 250 can be used on the following “programmable controllers”.
S115U/F - CPU 941/942/943/944/945
S135U-R/S - CPU 928/928B
S155U/H - CPU 948
FB 250 does not use system commands. All MDSs can be processed with
FB 250.
Primary functions of FB 250
SConvert data from user parameterization structure to structure of an ASM
SAll communication with the ASM via command data exchange
SError handling: Command repetition; Preparation of errors for the user
Chaining of several partial commands into one complete command
SReading and writing with a user command
SAny address areas of a mobile data memory can be processed with one
command.
SControl of PLC cycle load via the user
Data transmission between FB and MDS can be subdivided into three phases.
SSupply interface with the appropriate command and the data or parameter
STransmit the data between ASM 400 and MDS
SSupply S5 with appropriate parameters or data from the interface
When the P address area is available, FB 252 also supports operation of the
ASM 400 in the expanded Q address area.
Function block
FB 250
Interfaces
6-8 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6.2.2 Hardware Description
+ 24 Volt
GND
Channel
module
no. 1
Channel
module
no. 2
Channel
module
no. 3
Channel
module
no. 4
Metal front plate
Connection plug for the STG service and
test device
3 LEDs per channel:
Red LED
Yellow LED
Green LED
9-pole sub D socket
Screw for con-
nection of chan-
nel module to ba-
sic module for
EMC operation
Plug Connector Assignment
to SLG or STG
Pin Designation
Not used
+ Sending
+ Receiving
Not used
- Receiving
- Sending
Ground (0 V)
+24 V
Not used
Cable shield
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Geh.
Connection plug for SLG
9-pole sub D plug con-
nector with screw-type
lock, order no.
6GT2 090-0BB00
24 Volt plug connector
(This plug connector is
included with the ASM.)
Figure 6-2 Plug connectors and their assignment for ASM 400
Note
With the MOBY F, the voltage supply for the SLG cannot be connected via
the ASM.
Plug connectors
and their assign-
ment
Interfaces
6-9
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
x x
Switch 1
ON = 1
OFF = 0
ON = 1OFF = 0
18 8 1
1
1 4
2
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
X20
1 and 2 must
always be
jumpered on
X20.
Switch 2
Switch 3
Switch 4
Plug connector for
SIMATIC bus
Figure 6-3 Switches and plug-in jumpers for ASM 400
S4 = Setting of the type of addressing
S2 = Setting of the page frame number
S3 = Setting of the module address (linear addressing with PESP)
S1 = Address setting when PESP is not used
Table 6-4 Address settings for ASM 400 with FB 250/252
ASM 400 Switch Setting FB 250 Parameteri-
zation
FB 252 Parameteri-
zation
Start
Adress of
ASM
Switch
S3
4 3 2 1
Switch
S4
2 1
ADR KAN* QADR KAN
00 0 0 0 0 1 01 - 4
16 0 0 0 1 (This
tti
16 (Corre-
sponds
32 0 0 1 0
(
setting
of switch 32 spon
d
s
to chan-
48 0 0 1 1
of switch
4 must
l
Not 48
to chan
nel mod-
ule 1 to
64 0 1 0 0 always
be used
Not
available 64 u
l
e
1 t
o
4)
80 0 1 0 1
be used
when the
mod le
80
4)
96 0 1 1 0 module
is o
p
er- 96
112 0 1 1 1
is oper-
ated in
standard
112
128 1 0 0 0 standard
mode.
)
128 1 - 4 128
144 1 0 0 1
mode
.
)
144 (Corre-
sponds
144
160 1 0 1 0 160 spon
d
s
to chan- 160
176 1 0 1 1 176
to chan
nel mod-
ule 1 to
176
192 1 1 0 0 192 u
l
e
1 t
o
4) 192
208 1 1 0 1 208
4)
208
224 1 1 1 0 224 224
240 1 1 1 1 240 240
Switches and
plug-in jumpers
Address settings
Interfaces
6-10 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
EPROM
CPU
80C32
Plug-in jumper X20
Hybrid for
serial interface
X21 removed
CM422 für ASM 400
Plug-in jumper X20:
SRemoved:
Normal operation
SInserted:
Test operation; dialog to the mobile data memory is aborted earlier when
malfunctions occur. This helps to pinpoint weak spots and malfunctions
during commissioning.
Figure 6-4 Settings on the channel module
Settings on the
channel module
Interfaces
6-11
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6.2.3 SIMATIC S5 Configuration
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-5 CR 700-0LA module rack (S5-115U)
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-6 CR 700-0LB module rack (S5-115U)
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-7 CR 700-1 module rack (S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-0LA
(S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-0LB
(S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-1 (S5-115U)
Interfaces
6-12 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-8 CR 700-2 module rack (S5-115U)
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-9 CR 700-3 module rack (S5-115U)
ASM 400 MOBY interface modules cannot be used.
AS 314, AS 310, IM 317
IM 307 or IM 317
(only starting with
ER 701-3LA13)
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 4001
1 One SIMATIC adapter capsule required for each ASM 400
(order no. 6ES5 491-0LB11)
Figure 6-10 ER 701-3 module rack (S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-2 (S5-115U)
Module rack
CR 700-3 (S5-115U)
Module rack
ER 700-0,
ER 701-1 and
ER 701-2
Module rack
ER 701-3
Interfaces
6-13
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
Figure 6-11 S5-135U/-155U central controller
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
Figure 6-12 S5-155U/-155H central controller
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
Interface 312-3
Interface 310 or 314
Figure 6-13 EG S5-183U expansion device for S5-135U/-155U
Central controller
S5-135U/ -155U
Central controller
S5-155U/155H
Expansion device
EG S5-183U
Interfaces
6-14 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
Interface 312-5
Figure 6-14 EG S5-184U expansion device for S5-135U/155U
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
Interface 314
Figure 6-15 EG S5-185U expansion device for S5-135U/155U/155H
Slot designation
MOBY interface module ASM 400
Interface 312-5
Figure 6-16 EG S5-187U expansion device for S5-135U/155U
Expansion device
EG S5-184U
Expansion device
EG S5-185U
Expansion device
EG S5-187U
Interfaces
6-15
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6.3 ASM 410
Interface ASM 410 can be used in the SIMATICs listed below.
SS5-90U (max. of 2)
SS5-95U (max. of 4)
SS5-100U (max. of 8)
SET 100U (max. of 2)
SET 200U (max. of 4)
Since this ASM can be used with all mobile data memories, read/write de-
vices and the STG service test device, compatibility with all MOBY compo-
nents is ensured.
LEDs for status and error indications are located on the front. Interference-
immune design is provided by the galvanic isolation of the MOBY interface
to the SIMATIC S5 bus. The MOBY commands are started and data are
fetched by setting and scanning a few control bits in the process image (PIO/
PII), and eight input/output bytes are assigned. In time-multiplex operation,
one or two SLGs can be used. The MDS data are accessed via their absolute
addresses.
STG
Bus module of
PLC S5-100U
with ASM 410
1 Not for MOBY F
1
SLG SLG
MDS MDS
SIEMENS
MOBY F
SIEMENS
MOBY F
24V 24V
Figure 6-17 Configurator for ASM 410 in SIMATIC S5
Application area
Layout and
function
Interfaces
6-16 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-5 Ordering data of ASM 410
Order No.
ASM 410 interface for connection of up
to 2 SLGs (without bus module)
6GT2 002-0BA00
SIMATIC S5, bus module with terminal
block for
screw-type connection 6ES5 700-8MA11
Crimp connection, with crimp contacts,
increased EMC resistance
6ES5 700-8MA22
Stub lines and accessories See chapter 3.7.
Description of ASM 410
German
English
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-17
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-6 Technical data of ASM 410
Serial interface to SLG RS 422
Connection (max.) 2 SLGs can be connected via a separate
bus module
Line length (typ. max.) 1000 m/RS 422, depending on SLG and
type of cable
Number of SLGs
SStatic operation
SDynamic operation
Interface to STG
Interface for 24 V DC
2 SLGs (8x)
1 SLG (8x)
RS 422, 9-pole sub D plug connection
Via a separate bus module
Software functions
Programming With STEP5 directly via process image
(PIO/PII); no function block required;
5 bytes processed per command
Commands Select channel 1 or 2, read MDS, write
MDS, initialize MDS, etc.
Supply voltage1
Nominal value 24 V DC (residual ripple, max. of 10%)
Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Internal (at 5 V) Typical
Max.
20 to 60 mA
(20 mA = long cycle time)
(60 mA = short cycle time)
110 mA (PLC in STOP status)
External (at 24 V DC)
All SLGs, SLG switched off 90 mA
Power consumption, typ.
(without SLG)
2.5 W
Cooling Convection cooling
Isolation group C in acc. w. VDE 0110
Protection rating IP20 in acc. w. IEC 529
Physical stress IEC 68-2-27
Ambient temperature
During operation
SHorizontal SIMATIC layout 0° to +60° C
y
SVertical SIMATIC layout 0° to +40° C
During transportation and storage –25° to +70° C
Weight (approx.) 0.25 kg
1 With the MOBY F, the voltage supply of the SLG cannot be connected via the ASM.
Technical data
Interfaces
6-18 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
PLC S5-90U provides a maximum of four slots for additional modules. Up
to two of these can be used by the ASM 410 module.
ASM 410 can only be operated with PLC S5-95U in slots 0 to 7. Up to four
modules can be used on one PLC.
Starting with CPU release status -8MA-3, 8 modules can be used.
ASM 410 can only be operated with PLC S5-100U in slots 0 to 7. Up to
eight modules can be used on one PLC. See the following table for slot-
oriented addressing.
S5-100U
012345678
64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120
to
71 to
79 to
87 to
95 to
103 to
111 to
119 to
127
Slot number
Address assignment
Free slots for additional
digital modules
Slots in PLC
S5-90U
Slots in PLC
S5-95U
Slots in PLC
S5-100U
Interfaces
6-19
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The ASM 410 must be operated as an analog module in the ET 100U. When
parameterizing the module with the “COM ET 100U” software, the module
must be specified with “4AX” in the appropriate slot. The ASM 410 occu-
pies eight input bytes and eight output bytes (i.e., 16 bytes). Since a maxi-
mum of 32 bytes can be assigned per ET 100U in the address image of the
main controller, a maximum of two modules per ET 100U are permitted.
When other modules are used with an ET 100U in addition to the ASM 410,
only one module can be connected.
On the ET 100U, the ASM 410 can be addressed via all address areas of the
PLC (i.e., P, Q, IM3 and IM4).
C
P
U
ET 100U
Central controller
S5-135 U
S5-155 U
ET 100U
SIMATIC
DI DO DO
S5-115 U
ASM 410
Max. of 2 ASM 410s
per ET 100U
Max. of 32 ET 100Us
Max. cable length
3000 m
Figure 6-18 Configurator for ASM 410 in ET 100U
The ASM 410 can be used with the ET 200U under the following conditions.
SThe ET 200U with an ASM 410 installed must be operated in slow mode.
See ET 200U manual for how to set slow mode.
SThe “COM ET 200U” software is used to parameterize the ASM 410.
The ASM 410 module must be parameterized there with “095”.
SUp to four ASM 410s can be used with one ET 200U. When DI/DO or
other periphery is used with the ET 200U, fewer ASM 410s can be used.
Otherwise the same conditions as for the ET 100U apply.
Configuration of
ASM 410 in
ET 100U
Configuration of
ASM 410 in
ET 200U
Interfaces
6-20 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The ASM 410 interface has the same dimensions as any standard module for
the SIMATIC S5-100U. The interface can be installed directly on the bus
module (6ES5 700-8MA11 or 6ES5 700-8MA21).
A2
A3
A1
B1
B2
B3
MOBY I
6GT2002–0BA00
123456
5
1
6
9
STG
123
LEDs
Betriebsart
8
9
6
res.
0
2
4
68A
C
E
A
B
Anschaltmodul
ANW
aktiv
Fehler
1.SLG
2.SLG
Power
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
normal
ECC
Test+ECC
INIT norm
INIT ECC
res.
res.
Testbetr.
1.SLG
2.SLG
F
TEST
bzw.
Ventilation slits of the adapter cap-
sule: Make sure the ventilation slits
are not obstructed during operation.
Forced module ventilation is not re-
quired.
Label insert: Short texts in English
are on the back.
Status and error LEDs
Operating mode selection switch
Plug connector for serial S5 bus
9-pole sub D plug connector for
STG with stub line 6GT2091-0B...
(screw-type lock), not for MOBY F
Coding pin (not visible; on back of
module) in position “h” (i.e., analog
module)
10-pole plug connector for bus mo-
dule (24 V supply; SLG connection)
Figure 6-19 ASM 410 interface with operational and indicator elements
Physical layout
Interfaces
6-21
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-7 Status and error LEDs of ASM 410
No. Color Meaning
A1 Red Error: The last command was concluded with an error, or the
hardware of the module is defective.
A2 Yellow Rapid irregular flashing indicates running dialog with the SLG or
mobile data memory (MDS). This LED is always on when the
presence check is enabled.
A3 Green Data memory is in the field of the SLG. The SLG which detected
the MDS is indicated via LEDs B1-B2. LED is only active when
presence check is being used.
B1 Green B1 = 1st SLG is in operation.
Remember:
Only one of the LEDs (i.e., B1 and B2) may be on at a time. If
both LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG.
B2 Green B2 = 2nd SLG is in operation.
Remember:
Only one of the LEDs (i.e., B1 and B2) may be on at a time. If
both LEDs are on, check the wiring to the SLG.
B3 Green B3 = power on
This LED is always on when 24 V is applied to the module. The
interface module can be tested with the STG.
The operating mode is set with the operating mode selection switch on the
front of the ASM.
Setting of the operating mode:
ASM 410 uses the serial S5 bus. The STG interface is switched off.
Test operation with the STG (not for MOBY F):
Telegrams from the S5 are no longer processed.
Note
The serial S5 bus functions are not affected by switching to test operation
since this interface has its own microprocessor and is not dependent on
MOBY activities.
Setting the
operating mode
Positions 0 to 7
Positions 8 to F
Interfaces
6-22 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-8 Operating modes for ASM 410
Switch
Setting
Short Descrip-
tion on Label
Insert
Meaning
0 Normal Normal operating mode; read and write all MDS types;
ECC driver is disabled.
11ECC driver Read and write all MDS types; EEC driver is enabled.
2Test operation All MDS types can be processed during test operation.
The ASM 410 performs stricter error checks for com-
munication with the MDS so that weak points and
malfunctions can be detected during commissioning.
31Test + ECC The ECC driver is enabled. Otherwise same as switch
setting 2.
4INIT normal Initializes the MDS. When a write command is started
via the process image, an INIT command to the MDS
is started. The contents of the MDS are deleted.
51INIT ECC Initializes the MDS with ECC driver. Otherwise same
as switch setting 4.
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
81Test 1st or 2nd
SLG
An STG can be connected via the 9-pole sub D plug
connector so that all MOBY E hardware can be tested.
9 to F Reserved
1 Switch settings 1, 3, 5 and 8 cannot be used with MOBY F.
Interfaces
6-23
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
B U S M O D U LE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1. SLG
2. SLG
Stub line incl.
SLG plug connec-
tor and open end
with core sleeves
6GT2 491-0D...1
Color ID2 for stub lines
from Siemens
Ye
Wh
Br
Gr
Gn
Ye
Wh
Br
Gr
Gn
Mounting rail
Terminal strip on
bus module
Cable shield
Shield
+24 V
0 V
From exter-
nal power
supply
Max. cable length = 1000 m
1 In acc. with MOBY length key
2 Color ID
Gn = green = pin 4 in SLG plug connector; Ye = yellow = pin 5 in SLG plug connector;
Wh = white = pin 6 in SLG plug connector; Br = brown = pin 1 in SLG plug connector;
Gr = gray = pin 3 in SLG plug connector.
3 The SLG must be grounded on the grounding screw provided.
grounding
screw3
grounding
screw3
230V
24V
90 to
230V
24V
90 to
Figure 6-20 Wiring of one or two SLGs for ASM 410
Wiring of one or
two SLGs
Interfaces
6-24 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6.4 ASM 450/452
The ASM 450/452 interfaces are modules for operation of MOBY devices
via PROFIBUS DP / DPV1 on the following components.
SAll computers and PCs
SAll controllers
When the interfaces are used on a SIMATIC S7, function blocks are available
to the user.
Figure 6-21 ASM 450/452 interface
The ASM 450 accesses data on the MDS directly with physical addresses.
The ASM 450 uses cyclic operation with function block FB 240 (S5) or
FC 44 (S7). Appendix B of the FC 44 description is available to the
SIMATIC S5 user. All other users must use the description of the FC 44
function for the ASM 450.
Up to 2 SLGs can be connected to one ASM 450. Connection of two SLGs is
only recommended when static operation is used. When MDSs are processed
while passing by (i.e., dynamic operation), there is usually not enough time
to switch over the second SLG.
The ASM 452 is the further development of the familiar ASM 450 interface.
Use of non-cyclic data communication on PROFIBUS DPV1 ensures that
optimum data throughput is achieved even with large PROFIBUS
configurations. The minimum cyclic data load of the ASM 452 on
PROFIBUS guarantees the user that other PROFIBUS stations (e.g., DI/DQ)
can continue to work at very high speeds.
Up to 2 SLGs can be run on the ASM 452 in pseudo parallel mode. Pseudo
parallel mode means that the user can start one command on 2 SLGs at the
same time (via FC 45) although the ASM has only one serial channel. The
ASM automatically handles the multiplexing between SLG 1 and SLG 2.
Application area
ASM 450
ASM 452
Interfaces
6-25
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The SLG is processed on which an MDS happens to be. This delays the
processing of the second MDS. For this reason, we recommend only
processing the MDS statically when 2 SLGs are connected to the ASM. The
MDS data are accessed via physical addressing of the MDS. The SIMATIC
S7 offers FC 45 for this purpose. FC 45 gives the S7 user an easy-to-use
interface with powerful commands (e.g., one command processes an entire
MDS; command chaining; S7 data structures with UDTs).
The ASM 452 can also be parameterized as a dialog station. Only 1 SLG can
be operated on channel 1 in this mode.
Available memory (VMDS) is then 1321 bytes.
Table 6-9 Ordering data for ASM 450/452
ASM 450 interface
for PROFIBUS DP,
max. of 2 SLGs connectable
ASM 452 interface
for PROFIBUS DPV1,
max. of 2 SLGs connectable
6GT2 002-0EB00
6GT2 002-0EB20
Accessories
Plug connector for PROFIBUS DP connection
and 24 V power supply
Connection cable ASM 450/452 SLG
Length: 2 m
5 m
20 m
For other lengths see chap. 3.7.4.
Opt. connection plug,
ASM 450/452 ´ SLG
M12 covering caps for unused SLG connec-
tion (only ASM 450 and ASM 452)
1 package = 10 each
MOBY software 1
with FB 246, FB 240, FC 44, FC 45
GSD file
Other accessories for ASM 450
(network components)
6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0
6GT2 491-1CH20
6GT2 491-1CH50
6GT2 491-1CN20
6GT2 090-0BC00
3RX9 802-0AA0
6GT2 080-2AA10
See SIMATIC catalog ST 70 and
SIMATIC ET 200X manual.
Replacement part:
Plug connector plate; T-functionality for
PROFIBUS connection
6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0
Description-ASM 450/FC 44
German
English
French
Description-FC 45 (for ASM 452)
German
English
French
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See chapter 7.1.
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-26 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-10 Technical data of ASM 450/452
ASM 450 ASM 452
Serial interface to the user PROFIBUS DP PROFIBUS DPV1
Procedure in acc. w. EN 50170, vol. 2, PROFIBUS
Connection PG 11 screw connection
PROFIBUS and supply voltage plug connectors are not included.
Transmission speed 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud (automatic recognition)
Max. block length 208 bytes 2 words cyclic/
240 bytes acyclic
Serial interface to the SLG
Plug connector 2 coupling plug connectors (M12)
Line length (max.) 1000 m, depends on SLG
(2 m = standard length, other cables: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m)
SLGs which can be connected 2 SLG 8x (multiplex operation) 2 SLG 8x (pseudo parallel mode)
Software functions
Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DP master
Function blocks
SIMATIC S5 FB 240 –
SIMATIC S7 FC 44 FC 45
MDS addressing Direct access via
addresses
Direct access via
addresses
Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS,
write data to MDS, and so on
Initialize MDS, read data from MDS,
write data to MDS, and so on
Dialog: Normal station/VMDS Yes/No Yes/Yes
(Only 1 SLG can be operated on
channel 1 in VMDS mode.)
Supply voltage1
Nominal value 24 V DC
Permissible range 20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption 180 mA max., 130 mA typ.
(without SLG, DO not loaded)
Technical data
Interfaces
6-27
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-10 Technical data of ASM 450/452
ASM 452ASM 450
Digital inputs
Number 2 None
Galvanic isolation Yes
Input voltage
For logical “0” 0 to 5 V DC
For logical “1” 13 to 30 V DC
Input current for signal “1” 7 mA (typ.)
Delay time < 10 msec
Digital outputs
Number 2 None
Galvanic isolation Yes
Max. permissible current 0.5 A
Short-circuit protection Yes (electronic)
Line length (max.) 30 m
Ambient temperature
During operation 0° to +55° C
During transportation and storage –40° to +70° C
Dimensions (WxHxD) in mm 134 x 110 x 55 (without bus plug)
Mounting 4 M5 screws, mounting on any plate or wall
Weight (approx.) 0.5 kg
Protection rating IP67
MTBF (at 40 °C) 30 S 104 hours = 34 years
1 With the MOBY F, the SLG power supply cannot be obtained from the ASM.
Interfaces
6-28 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
2 m*
MDS MDS
SIEMENS
MOBY F
SIEMENS
MOBY F
24V 24V
2nd SLG
PROFIBUS DP
master module
(e.g., S7-400 CPU)
1st SLG
PROFIBUS cable
To additional
PROFIBUS
stations
AT-comp. PC
24 V
for
ASM
* Standard cable length
Figure 6-22 Configurator of ASM 450/452
The ASM 450/452 is equipped with the same housing as the ET 200X decen-
tral I/O device. See ET 200X manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA00-8AA0) for
general technical information on the ASM 450/452 (e.g., mounting, operation
and wiring, and general technical specifications). Accessories and power
supply components are also described in this manual.
The ASM 450/452 is integrated in the hardware configuration with a GSD
file. The ASM can then be configured via HWCONFIG of the SIMATIC
Manager or another PROFIBUS tool. The “Software MOBY” CD contains a
separate GSD file for each ASM model.
Since an SLG always occupies two M12 connection sockets on the
ASM 450/451/452, a prefabricated cable (cf. figure 6-24 or chapter 3.7)
makes it easy to connect the SLG. In its standard version, the connection
cable has a length of 2 m. For other cable lengths, see chapter 3.7.4.
An SLG plug connector with screw-type terminals is available for users who
want to make their own cable (see figure 6-23). Cable and SLG plug connec-
tor can be ordered from the MOBY catalog.
Hardware
description
PROFIBUS
configuration
SLG connection
technique
Interfaces
6-29
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
1
2
3
4
5
6
S
S
Connector
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
S
S
Core
Color
Green
White
Brown
Yellow
Gray
- (nc)
- (nc)
Shield
Connection to
PIN of SLG
connector
(9–pole sub-
min D)
3
2
6
5
7
-
-
1/8
Plug hood removed
SLG–cable: e.g. LiYC11Y
PG11 screw connection, max. cable dia-
meter = 6.5 mm (Do not tighten screw until
plug connector is assembled.)
2 screws to open
the plug connec-
tor
Coupling connector
M12 on ASM 450
Protection rating IP67
48
18.5
Figure 6-23 Connection plug, ASM 450/452 SLG (6GT2 090-0BC00)
2
6
3
5
7
Two 5-pole, round
M12 plug connectors
X1/2
X1/3
X1/1
X1/4
X2/3
X1/5
X2/5
9-pole submin D
(socket, screw-
type-lock)
1
ASM Side SLG Side1
1
8
1Caution:
If metallized sub D housings are used on the SLG/SIM side, the housing must
be connected to the cable shield.
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Gray
(Shield)
X1 X2
25
18.5
Figure 6-24 Connection cable, ASM 450/452 SLG (6GT2 491-1C...)
Interfaces
6-30 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The ASM 450/452 can also be used with the “green” PROFIBUS cable.
Make sure that a 24 V cable is installed from X12 to X13. The 24 V line on
plug X12 can be connected to pin 5, 6.
X13 X11
X12
X13 X11
X12
Figure 6-25 PROFIBUS cable with 24 V power
PROFIBUS cable
with 24 V power
Interfaces
6-31
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
SLG - SLG 2xDA SLG
- SLG 2xDE SLG SLG
x1 x2
x3 x4
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th *
* This configuration only applies to static processing
of the MDS.
x1 – x2
x3 – x4
SLG - SLG
- SLG SLG
1st 2nd 3rd *
x1 – x2
x3 – x4
Config
Plug
Config
Plug
Figure 6-26 SLG and DI/DO configuration for ASM 450/452
The versions shown in figure 6-26 can be set up with the standard cables of
MOBY or ET 200X.
Note
Although the configuration with 2 SLGs + DI + DO is also possible with the
ASM 450, the components require special customer-related wiring.
The following figure shows a dimensional drawing of an ASM 450/452 with
bus connection plugs. You must add the length of the PG screw connection
and the radius of the cable used to the total width and depth specified.
110
90
53.5 28.25
134
120
Ø 5.5
Figure 6-27 Dimensional drawing of the ASM 450/452
SLG and DI/DO
configuration for
ASM 450/452
Dimensional
drawing of
ASM 450/452 with
mounting
holes
Interfaces
6-32 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The following figure shows the pin allocation of the ASM 450/452.
1
2
3
45
654
32
1
X1 X2
X3 X4
654
654
32
1
32
1
X11
X12
X13
Socket
X11 and X12
(PROFIBUS DP)
Pin Allocation
1 Signal B (red)
2PE
3* PE
4 Signal A (green)
5* L+
6* M
X13
(Power supply)
1PE
2L+
3M
4PE
5L+
6M
SF
BF
ON
DC 24 V
LEDs for MOBY and ASM 452
RxD: SLG with command active
PRE/ERR 1, MDS present or error indicator
PRE/ERR 2: MDS present:
The LED is permanently ON. If more
than one MDS is in the field, the
number of the MDS is indicated with
a brief LED interruption.
There is no error output.
Error indicator:
The LED is permanently OFF. The last
error number is indicated with brief
pulses of light.
SLG 1: SLG 1 is selected.
SLG 2: SLG 2 is selected.
Only SLG 1 or SLG 2 can be selected.
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP
SF: System fault (see table 6-11)
BF: Bus fault (see table 6-11)
ON: Goes on when the logic voltage
is applied to the ASM (is generated
from the 24 V power supply).
DC 24 V: Goes on when the 24 V power supply
is connected to the ASM.
* Do not circuit
Pin Allocation (SLG)
Socket
X1/X3
X2/X4
1 +RxD
2 +TxD
3 ĆTxD
4 ĆRxD
5PE
RxD
ERR ANW
ASM 450
ASM 452
LEDs for MOBY and ASM 450
RxD: SLG active
ANW: MDS present or status of DA1
ERR: Error indicator or status of DA0
SLG1/2: Shows the selected SLG. Only SLG1
or SLG2 can be selected.
DE0/1: Status of the digital inputs.
1
2
3
45
654
321
X1 X2
X3 X4
654
654
321
321
X11
X12
X13
SF
DC 24 V
RxD
PRE/ERR 2
DE0 DE1
SLG2
RxD
SLG1
BF
ON
PRE/ERR 1
1 +24 V +24 V
2 DA1 DE1
3 0 V 0 V
4 DA0 DE0
5PEPE
X2 X4
SLG1
SLG2
RxD
DE0 DE1
Figure 6-28 Pin allocation and LEDs of ASM 450/452
Note
With the MOBY F, the SLG power supply cannot be obtained from the
ASM.
Pin allocation
Interfaces
6-33
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The following table lists the possible error displays, what they mean and how
to eliminate the cause of the fault.
Table 6-11 LEDs for PROFIBUS diagnostics
LED
“BF”
LED
“SF”
Cause Error handling:
On * SASM 450/452 is starting up. –
SThe connection to the DP-master has
failed.
SThe ASM 450/452 cannot detect a trans-
mission rate.
SCheck the PROFIBUS DP connection.
SCheck the DP-master.
SBus interruption
SDP-master is out of operation
SCheck all the cables in your
PROFIBUS DP network.
SCheck whether the PROFIBUS DP connec-
tor is plugged in correctly on the
ASM 450/452.
Flashes On SThe configuration data sent from the DP
master to the ASM 450/452 do not corre-
spond to the configuration of the
ASM 450/452.
SCheck the configuration of the
ASM 450/452 (input/output, PROFIBUS
address).
SCorrect device master file used?
– SIEM804C.GSD for ASM 450
– SIEM80B6.GSD for ASM 452
Flashes Off SThe ASM 450/452 has detected the trans-
mission rate but is not addressed by the
DP master.
SThe ASM 450/452 was not configured.
SCheck the PROFIBUS address set on the
ASM 450/452 or in the configuration soft-
ware.
SCheck the configuration of the
ASM 450/452 (station type).
On Flashes SThere is a hardware defect on the
ASM 450/452.
SReplace the ASM 450/452.
* Status is not relevant
The following figure shows an example of bared lengths. The lengths are
valid for all cables which you can connect to the connection plug. Any shield
braiding must be twisted, inserted in a core end sleeve, and the excess cut off.
Twisted and trimmed
shield braiding
45
6
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Figure 6-29 Length of baring for a PROFIBUS cable
PROFIBUS
diagnostics
Example for bared
lengths
Interfaces
6-34 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The plug plate must be removed from the ASM before you can set the
PROFIBUS address or circuit the terminating resistance. The plug plate co-
vers the DIP switches. The following figure shows the location of the DIP
switches on the ASM and a sample setting of each.
Example: PROFIBUS address 120 (status on delivery)
76543
21
ON
23 +24 + 25 + 26 = 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 = 120
8
Example: Terminating resistance turned off (status on delivery)
off
on
ASM 450
Not
conn.
Not
conn.
ASM 452
Normal operation
(use GSD file
SIEM80B6)
ASM 451-compatible
(use GSD file
SIEM804D)
Figure 6-30 Setting the PROFIBUS address and circuiting the terminating resistance
Note
SThe PROFIBUS address on the ASM 450/452 must always correspond to
the PROFIBUS address specified for this ASM with the configuration
software.
SFor correct functioning of the terminating resistance, always switch both
DIP switches of the terminating resistance to “On” or “Off”.
PROFIBUS
address and
terminating
resistance
Interfaces
6-35
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6.5 ASM 470/475
The ASM 470/475 interface can be installed in the SIMATIC S7-300 and
ET 200M. It can be used for all MOBY systems.
Up to eight ASM 470/475 interfaces can be installed and operated in one
module rack of the SIMATIC S7-300. When a layout with several module
racks (maximum of four) is used, the ASM 470/475 can be installed and
operated in each of these module racks. In a maximum SIMATIC S7-300
configuration, up to 32 ASM can be used centrally. The ASMs can also be
used in the distributed I/O ET 200M on PROFIBUS. This makes use in an
S7-400 environment possible. Up to 7 ASMs can be operated per ET 200M.
Error messages and operational states are indicated with LEDs. Galvanic
isolation between SLG and the SIMATIC S7-300 bus ensure layouts which
are not as susceptible to interference.
Figure 6-31 ASM 470/475 interface
In multiplex operation, up to two SLGs can be connected to the ASM 470.
The FC 47 function block ensures simple programming via SIMATIC S7
tools. The FC 47 can be used with both the S7-300 and the S7-400. The
ET 200M can also be used to operate the ASM 470 in a SIMATIC S5 envi-
ronment. FB 47 is available for PLCs 115U to 155U.
On the hardware side, communication between ASM 470 and the S7-300
CPU is handled by a 16-byte address area so that up to 12 bytes of user data
can be transferred with each read/write command.
Application area
ASM 470
Interfaces
6-36 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The ASM 475 with the order number 6GT2 002-0GA10 is a parameterizable
module. Basic functions of the module are already specified when the mo-
dule is configured in HW-Config (e.g., normal addressing).
The ASM 475 accesses the data on the MDS directly with physical addresses.
The FC 45 function controls use in a SIMATIC S7.
Together the ASM 475 and FC 45 form a unit which can be used to read the
MDS data easily and at optimum speed. A 32-Kbyte MDS memory can be
read in 24 seconds, almost without regard to the S7 cycle time.
The filehandler function is not offered by MOBY F.
ASM 470
ASM 475
Shield connection terminal
(6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0)
Shield connecting element
(6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0)
for 2 modules
6GT2 491-0E...
(see chap. 3.7
or figure 6-34)
SLGSLG
MDS MDS
SIEMENS
MOBY F
SIEMENS
MOBY F
24V 24V
Figure 6-32 Configurator for ASM 470/475
ASM 475
ASM 475
(Normal
addressing)
ASM 475
(Filehandler)
Interfaces
6-37
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-12 Ordering data for ASM 470/475
Interface ASM 470
for SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG multiplex;
no front plug
Interface ASM 475
for SIMATIC S7-300; 2 SLG parallel;
normal addressing; no front plug
6GT2 002-0FA10
6GT2 002-0GA10
Accessories
Front connector (1 per ASM)
Shield connection terminal (1 per SLG cable)
Shield connecting element (1 per 2 ASMs)
Connection cable, ASM ↔ SLG
Length: 5 m
20 m
50 m
MOBY software1
with FC 47, FB 47 for ASM 470,
FC 45 for ASM 475
6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0
6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0
6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0
6GT2 491-0EH50
6GT2 491-0EN20
6GT2 491-0EN50
6GT2 080-2AA10
Description-ASM 470/FC 47 for S7
German
English
Description-ASM 470/FB 47 for S5
German
Englisch
Description-FC 45 (ASM 475)
German
Englisch
French
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See chapter 7.1.
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-38 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-13 Technical data of ASM 470/475
ASM Type ASM 470 ASM 475
Interface to S7-300 or ET 200M P-bus; I/O input and I/O output P-bus; cyclic and non-cyclic services
Communication 16 bytes I/O 2 words (cyclic);
238 bytes (non-cyclic)
Command buffer on ASM 1 x 12 bytes per ASM 70 x 238 bytes per SLG
Serial interface to the SLG
Plug connector Via screw terminals on front plug
Front plug connector is not included.
Line length, max. Standard cable = 2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 50 m
(up to 1000 m on request)
MOBY systems supported I/E/F/V I/E/F
Connectable SLGs Multiplex
2 x SLG
Parallel
2 x SLG
Software functions
Programming SIMATIC user: With FC/FB
Other users: Telegram description as per appendix of FC description
Function block
SIMATIC S7 FC 47 FC 45
SIMATIC S5 FB 47 –
MDS addressing Direct access via addresses
Commands Initialize MDS, read data from MDS, write data to MDS
Dialog MOBY I:
Normal station/VMDS Yes/Yes Yes/No
PROFIBUS diagnosis Yes. Can be parameterized via RESET.
S7 diagnosis No Yes. Can be called via S7 OM.
Firmware reloadable No Yes. Via S7 OM.
Power supply1
Nominal value 24 V DC
Permissible range 20 V to 30 V DC 20.4 V to 28.8 V DC
Current consumption
SWithout SLG at
U = 24 V DC, max.
50 mA 350 mA
SWith SLG connected Max. of 600 mA with one SLG
Max. of 300 mA per SLG when two
SLGs are connected
Max. of 500 mA per connected SLG
Technical data
Interfaces
6-39
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-13 Technical data of ASM 470/475
ASM Type ASM 475ASM 470
Power loss of the
module, typical
1 W 2 W
Current consumption from
P-bus, max.
100 mA 80 mA
Galvanic isolation between S7-300
and MOBY
Depends (100 kΩ between S7-300
and 24 V DC)
Yes. Use for ungrounded operation
of a separate power pack for the
ASM.
Fuse, 24 V to SLG Yes. Electronic. Yes. Electronic.
Ambient temperature
During operation
SSIMATIC horizontal 0°C to +60°C
SSIMATIC vertical 0°C to +40°C
During transportation and
storage
–40°C to +70°C
Dimensions in mm (W x H x D) 40 x 125 x 120
Weight, approx. 0.2 kg
1 With MOBY F, the SLG voltage supply cannot be connected via the ASM.
Interfaces
6-40 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The ASM 470/475 is commissioned with the following steps.
SMount module
SMount module on the S7-300 mounting rail. See S7-300 manual.
Note
The CPU of the S7-300 must be switched to STOP status before the module
is mounted.
!Warning
The S7-300 may only be wired when the voltage is off.
Note
To ensure interference-free operation of the ASM 475, make sure that ASM
and SIMATIC CPU (or ASM and IM 153 with ET 200M) are run on the
same voltage.
Non-adherence may cause possible error messages on the CPU not to be
cleared when the ASM is turned on.
Wiring
Interfaces
6-41
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The following figure shows the front plate of the ASM 470/475 and the in-
side of the front door with the related connection diagram. The SLGs must
be connected to the ASM as shown in the connection diagram.
SLG 1
S+
S–
E+
E–
SLG 2
S+
S–
E+
E–
ASM475 SF
DC5 V
ACT_1
ERR_1
PRE_1
RxD_1
ACT_2
ERR_2
PRE_2
RxD_2
6GT2 002-0GA106GT2 002-0FA10
MOBY
ASM470
MOBY
SF
24 V
Active
Error
SLG 1
RxD
ANW
Error
SLG 2
RxD
Status and error indicators Connection diagram
The numbers for the con-
nection are based on plug
connector X1 located on the
upper part of the housing.
Figure 6-33 Front plate and inside of the front door of the ASM 470/475
Note
The power supply for MOBY F cannot be obtained from the ASM.
Front panel
Interfaces
6-42 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-14 Function of the LEDs on ASM 470/475
ASM 470 ASM 475 Meaning
SF SF System fault (hardware error on ASM)
24 V DC 5 V 24 V are connected to ASM.
5 V voltage on ASM is okay.
Active ACT_1, ACT_2 The appropriate SLG is processing a user com-
mand.
Error ERR_1, ERR_2 The flashing pattern shows the last error. This indi-
cator can be reset with the option_1 parameter.
ANW PRE_1, PRE_2 Indicates the presence of an MDS
RxD RxD_1, RxD_2 Indicates communication to the SLG. Interference
on SLG can also cause this LED to light up.
SLG 1, SLG 2 –Indicates the SLG which was selected by the user
command. Only one LED may light up at a time
(multiplex operation).
Additional operational states are indicated on the ASM 475 on the LEDs
PRE, ERR, and SF.
Table 6-15 Additional LEDs on the ASM 475
SF PRE_1 ERR_1 PRE_2 ERR_2 Description, Causes, Remedy
ON OFF/ON ON (perm.) OFF/ON ON (perm.) Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, ...)
ON OFF ON OFF OFF Loader is defective (can only be fixed at the plant).
OFF 2 Hz OFF 2 Hz OFF Firmware is being loaded or no firmware detected.
→Load firmware.
→Do not turn off ASM.
OFF 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz 2 Hz Firmware loading terminated with error
→New start required.
→Load firmware again.
→Check update files.
Any 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz 5 Hz Operating system error
→Turn ASM on/off.
OFF OFF 1 x flash
every 2 sec
OFF 1 x flash
every 2 sec
ASM has booted and is waiting for a RESET
(init_run) from the user.
Indicator elements
on ASM
Interfaces
6-43
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The figure below shows a connection cable between ASM and SLG. The
colors apply to the standard MOBY cable for the ASM 470. See chapter
3.7.3.
White
Brown
Green
Yellow
Pink
Grey
6
1
4
5
2
3
4 (12)
5 (13)
6 (14)
7 (15)
8 (16)
9 (17)
Front plug connector
of ASM
(6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0)
Cable with core sleeves
(Shield)
Cable shield bared
SLG plug connector
(socket)
Figure 6-34 Wiring of ASM 470/475 to SLG (6GT2 091-0E...)
See chapter 3.6 or figure 6-32.
Implement the lightning protection and grounding measures required for your
application. Lightning protection measures always require individual consid-
eration of the entire system.
To ensure EMC, the SLG cable must be led over an S7-300 shield connecting
element (see figure 3-30). When customers make their own cables, the shield
of the SLG cable must be bared as shown in figure 6-35.
17030 Specifications
in mm
Figure 6-35 Baring of the cable shield when customer makes own cable
Wiring to the SLG
Shield connection
Lightning protec-
tion
Customer cable
fabricating
Interfaces
6-44 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Note
Installation of MOBY requires functional STEP 7 software on the PC/PG.
Installation and configuration of the ASM 470/475 in the SIMATIC is han-
dled by an installation program. The installation program is included with
the “MOBY software” product (6GT2 080-2AA10).
The “Software MOBY” CD contains the installation files in subdirectory
S7_om. Installation is almost completely automatic when Setup.exe is cal-
led. The specified steps during SETUP must be responded to.
Note
Remember that you will have to execute a separate Setup for installation of
ASM 470 and ASM 475.
The ASM 470/475 module is located in the hardware catalog of HWCONFIG
under the following subdirectory for hardware configuration of the SIMATIC
S7.
SIMATIC 300
SM 300
Special 300
MOBY ASM470
MOBY ASM475
MOBY ASM475 PARAM
Figure 6-36 ASM 470/475 directory in the hardware catalog
Configuration
of ASM for
SIMATIC S7
under STEP 7
Installation
Interfaces
6-45
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
You can use the file-dearchivation function of the SIMATIC Manager to load
the FC with a sample project from the applicable subdirectory of the “Soft-
ware MOBY” CD. Afterwards, the sample project is located in the directory
S7PROJ of the SIMATIC Manager.
ASM Type Directory in
“Software MOBY”
Project Name in
SIMATIC Manager
Path Name in
SIMATIC Manager
ASM 470
ASM 475
FC47
FC45
ASM470_CPU416
MOBY FC45
ASM470_C
Moby_f_1
FC 45/47 with
sample project
Interfaces
6-46 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6.6 ASM 473
The ASM 473 interface is a MOBY module for the SIMATIC S7. It can
be installed in the ET 200X and DESINA distributed I/O device. The inter-
face of the ET 200X to the user is PROFIBUS DPV1. An S7-300 or S7-400
with integrated PROFIBUS connection can be used as the controller.
The ASM 473 supplements the SIMATIC S7 MOBY interface modules
ASM 470 and ASM 475. Its protection rating of IP 67 permits it to be
set up and operated directly in the process without additional protection.
An ET 200X basic module (BM 141/142) with order number
6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0 or 6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 is a prerequisite for use
of the ASM 473.
Currently, the ASM 473 cannot be used with the preconditioning basic mod-
ule BM 147/CPU.
The MDS data are accessed by physically addressing the MDS.
The FC 45 function is available for use in a SIMATIC S7. The hardware con-
figuration of the ASM 473 is performed with an Object Manager which is
integrated in the SIMATIC Manager.
Other features:
SUp to 7 ASM 473s can be operated in one ET 200X station.
SAll I/O modules from the ET 200X family can be run parallel to the
ASM 473.
Figure 6-37 ASM 473 interface
Application area
Interfaces
6-47
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-16 Ordering data of ASM 473
ASM 473 interface module 6GT2 002-0HA00
Accessories:
SLG cable (length 2 m = standard cable)
Length: 5 m
20 m
for other lengths, see chapter 3.7.4
Opt. ASM connection plug without SLG cable
(for cable lengths > 20 m)
Software MOBY 1
with FC 45 incl. documentation
6GT2 491-1CH20
6GT2 491-1CH50
6GT2 491-1CN20
6GT2 090-0BC00
6GT2 080-2AA10
Description of FC 45
German
English
French
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
1 See chapter 7.1.
Table 6-17 Technical data of ASM 473
Interface to ET 200X
Communication
Command buffer in ASM
SIMATIC S7 P-bus
Cyclic and non-cyclic services
2 words (cyclic)/
238 bytes (non-cyclic)
142 x 238 bytes
Serial interface to SLG
Plug connector
Line length, max.
Connectable SLGs
2 x coupling plug, M12
20 m
2 m = standard length
Other fabricatable cables =
5 m, 20 m
(up to 1000 m on request)
1 x SLG 8x
Software functions
Programming
SIMATIC S7 function block
MDS addressing
Commands
PROFIBUS diagnosis
S7 diagnosis
Reloadable firmware
Depends on PROFIBUS DP ma-
ster
FC 45
Direct access via addresses
Initialize MDS,
read data from MDS,
write data to MDS
Yes; ET 200X basic station.
Yes. Can be called via S7 OM.
Yes. Via S7 OM.
Ordering data
Technical data
Interfaces
6-48 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-17 Technical data of ASM 473
Power supply1
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption
SFrom encoder voltage
Power loss of module
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
24 V DC
20.4 V to 28.8 V DC
75 mA, typical
1.6 W, typical
Via expansion modules from
ET 200X family
Via expansion modules from
ET 200X family
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
0°C to +55°C
–40°C to +70°C
Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm
Dimensions of single devices
Dimensions of scale
Mounting
87 x 110 x 55
60 x 110 x 55
2 M5 screws (customer)
2 M3 screws (device)
Protection rating IP67
Weight 0.275 kg
1 With MOBY F, the SLG power supply cannot be obtained from the ASM.
For setup guidelines and other general technical data, see the ET 200X
manual (order no. 6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0).
Interfaces
6-49
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
SLG
MDS
SIEMENS
MOBY F
24V
PROFIBUS DP master module
(e.g., S7-400 CPU)
(Connection of other master is
under preparation.)
2 m (standard cable length)
PROFIBUS
cable to all
PROFIBUS slaves
24 V for ET 200X
electronics and
MOBY-SLG
Basis model:
BM 141
BM 142
BM 143
BM 147
Figure 6-38 Configurator for an ASM 473
Note
In contrast to ASM 45x (see figure 6-22), the 24 V power must be provided
on the PROFIBUS plug and the load voltage plug. For details, see ET 200X
manual.
Configuration
Interfaces
6-50 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The following table shows the status of the ET 200X modules as of 06/2002.
The functionality of newer basis modules is stored in HW-Config of
SIMATIC Manager.
Table 6-18 Prerequsites for operation of the ASM 473
Order Number of the
ET 200X Basis Module
To Operate with
ASM 473
(6GT2 002-0HA00)
To Operate with
ASM 473 PARAM
(6GT2 002-0HA10)
6ES7 141-1BF00-0XB0 No No
6ES7 141-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 141-1BF01-0XB0 No No
6ES7 141-1BF10-0XB0 No No
6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 141-1BF40-0AB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 142-1BD10-0XB0 No No
6ES7 142-1BD11-0XB0 No No
6ES7 142-1BD20-0XB0 No No
6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 143-1BF00-0AB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 143-1BF00-0XB0 Yes Yes
6ES7 147-1AA00-0XB0 No No
6ES7 147-1AA01-0XB0 No Yes
Basis module –
prerequisites for
operation of the
ASM 473
Interfaces
6-51
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
SLG SLG SLG SLG
MDS MDSMDS MDS
SIEMENS
MOBY F
SIEMENS
MOBY F
SIEMENS
MOBY F
SIEMENS
MOBY F
24V 24V 24V 24V
. . .
. . .
Up to 7 ASM 473s can be operated
in one ET 200X.
Figure 6-39 Maximum configuration of ASM 473 on an ET 200X
Depending on the PROFIBUS master, up to 123 ET 200X modules can be
run on one PROFIBUS branch.
The ASM 473 is integrated in the hardware configuration of SIMATIC
Manager by calling Setup.exe in the directory daten/S7_OM on the “Soft-
ware MOBY” CD. Currently, the ASM 473 cannot be integrated in other
masters.
An SLG always occupies the two M12 connection sockets (X3 and X 4) on
the ASM 473. A prefabricated cable (cf. figure 6-24 or chapter 3.7) ensures
easy connection of the SLG. The standard version of this cable is 2 m in
length. Other lengths are available on request.
An SLG connection plug with screw terminals (see figure 6-23) is available
for users who want to make their own cable. Cable and SLG connection plug
can be ordered from the MOBY catalog.
Hardware
configuration
SLG connection
Interfaces
6-52 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The following figure shows the pin assignment to the SLG and the indicator
elements.
ERR
ON (perm.)
OFF
OFF
2 Hz
5 Hz
1 x flash
every 2 sec
PRE
OFF/ON
ON
2 Hz
2 Hz
5 Hz
OFF
Socket Pin assignment (SLG)
1
2
3
4
5
+RxD
+TxD
–TxD
–RxD
PE
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP
General operational indicators (SF, BF, ON, DC24 V) are located on the
basic module of the ET 200X.
LEDs for MOBY
RxD: SLG is busy with a command.
PRE: Indicates the presence of an MDS
ERR: Flashing pattern (see appendix B.1) indicates error.
X3
1
2
3
4
5
+24 V
n. c.
0 V
n. c.
PE
X4
Additional operational states of the ASM are indicated on the LEDs PRE and
ERR.
Description, Causes, Remedy
Hardware is defective (RAM, flash, ...).
Loader is defective (can only be repaired at the
plant).
Firmware is being loaded or no firmware detected.
→Load firmware.
→Do not turn off ASM.
Firmware loading terminated with error
→New start required.
→Load firmware again.
→Check update files.
Operating system error
→Turn ASM or ET 200X basis station off/on.
ASM booted and is waiting for a RESET (init_run)
from the user.
Figure 6-40 Pin asssignment and LEDs of ASM 473
Note
With the MOBY F, the SLG power cannot be connected via the ASM.
Pin assignment
Interfaces
6-53
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The figure below shows the dimensions for the positions of the holes for the
screws. This information applies to a basic module and an expansion module
(ASM 473).
n 60
120
53.5
n = number of expansion modules
28.25
126.8
BM 141/142 ASM 473
87
110
For M5
mounting
screw
Figure 6-41 Dimensions for mounting holes for basic and expansion modules.
Dimensions for the
mounting holes
Interfaces
6-54 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6.7 ASM 824/850/854
The ASM 824/850/854 interfaces are designed for distributed installation in
warehousing, logistical and distribution applications. The functional, robust
housing fits anywhere. Up to four read/write antennas can be connected and
run parallel to each other. This ensures dynamic operation of MDS and SLA.
The read/write antennas (SLA 81) and stub lines must be ordered separately.
The MOBY wide-range power pack (6GT2 494-0AA00) can be used. The
user has a choice of two interfaces.
SPROFIBUS DPV1 (ASM 850, ASM 854)
SRS 232: serial interface to PC and PC-compatible controllers
(e.g., SICOMP, ASM 824)
Figure 6-42 ASM 824/850/854 interface module
Data on the MDS are accessed with the ASM 824 directly with physical ad-
dresses. The ASM 824 can be operated in parallel with up to four SLA 81s.
Communication to the user is handled by a serial RS 232/422 interface with
the 3964R protocol. This provides an easy way to connect PCs and other con-
trollers to the MOBY F identification system. A C library (MOBY API) is
available to users for their application.
The ASM 850 accesses the data on the MDS directly via physical addresses.
The ASM 850 is a low-cost solution for the connection of one SLA 81.
Communication to the user is handled by the non-cyclic protocol service of
PROFIBUS DPV1. Function FC 45 is available to SIMATIC S7-300/400
users for simple integration.
Application
area
ASM 824
ASM 850
Interfaces
6-55
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The ASM 854 accesses the data on the MDS directly with physical addresses.
Communication to the user is handled by the non-cyclic protocol service of
PROFIBUS DPV1. Function FC 45 is available to SIMATIC S7-300/400 us-
ers for simple integration. The ASM 854 can be operated in parallel with up
to four SLA 81s.
The description of the PROFIBUS DPV1 implementation is available to pro-
grammers of other controllers (see appendix of FC 45 description).
Table 6-19 Ordering data of the ASM 824/850/854
ASM 824 interfaces
with RS 232/RS 422 serial interface.
3964R procedure for PC, SICOMP and
other controllers. For four SLA 81s.
6GT2 402-2CE00
ASM 850 interfaces
for operation of MOBY F components
via PROFIBUS DPV1, without filehandler.
For one SLA 81.
6GT2 402-2EA00
ASM 854 interfaces
for operation of MOBY F components
via PROFIBUS DP and DPV1
(PROFIBUS DP only for MDS 1xx (r/o)).
Without filehandler. For four SLA 81s.
6GT2 402-2BB00
Accessories:
Read/write antenna, SLA 81 6GT2 401-2BB00
Standard connection cable between
SLA 81 ↔ ASM 824/850/854.
Length: 5 m 6GT2 391-1AH50
Extension for antenna cable
6GT2 391-1AH50.
Length: 10 m
25 m
6GT2 391-1BN10
6GT2 391-1BN25
Mounting clamp for SLA 81 3SX6 284
Wide-range power pack, 100 to 230 V AC/
24 V DC. 2.2 A (without 24 V cable).
6GT2 494-0AA00
24 V DC stub line for wide-range power pack,
6GT2 494-0AA00.
Length: 5 m 6GT2 491-1HH50
RS 232 stub line between PC and ASM 824.
Can be fabricated up to 32 m. For lengths see
chapter 3.7.4.
6GT2 391-0B...
Plug connector for voltage supply (socket) for
ASM 824/850/854
6GT2 390-1AB00
PROFIBUS plug connector
9-pole, submin. D plug connector for 2 stub lines
6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0
(For other plug connectors,
see catalog ST 70 or IK PI.)
ASM 854
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-56 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-19 Ordering data of the ASM 824/850/854
Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting for
ASM 824/850/854
6GT2 390-0BA00
C library for ASM 824 (MOBY API) Included on “Software MOBY”
CD (see chap. 7.1)
FC 45 for ASM 850 and ASM 854 Included on “Software MOBY”
CD (see chap. 7.1)
Description of FC 45
For programming ASM 850/854
German
English
French
Description MOBY API
(C-Lib for ASM 850/854)
German
English
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
Electronically available on
“Software MOBY” CD
SLA SLA SLA SLA
MDS MDSMDS MDS
PROFIBUS
DPV1
24 V
DC
230 V
AC MOBY power
pack or other
24 V connection
ASM_channel: 1 2 3 4
MOBY F
SLA 8x and
MDS Fxxx
PROFIBUS master
S7-300 (FC 45)
S7-400 (FC 45)
Other master
(external FC)
6GT2 391-1AH50
6GT2 491-1HH50
6GT2 494-0AA00
Figure 6-43 Configurator for ASM 824, ASM 850 (only with 1 x SLA 8x) and ASM 854
Interfaces
6-57
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-20 Technical data of the ASM 824/850/854
ASM 850 ASM 854 ASM 824
Serial interface to user
Max. cable length
PROFIBUS DPV1
See PROFIBUS configuration.
RS 232/RS 422
30/500 m
Procedure/protocol EN 50170, vol. 2, PROFIBUS 3964R
Connection 9-pole, submin D socket (screw lock)
Transmission speed 9600 baud to 12 Mbaud
(automatic recognition)
38.4 kbaud
Max. block length 4 words (cyclic)/238 bytes (non cyclic) 238 bytes
Serial interface to SLA 9-pole, submin. D socket (screw lock)
Max. cable length
(ASM-SLA)
Max. of 55 m
SLAs which can be
connected
1 x SLA 81 4 x SLA 81 4 x SLA 81
Software functions
Programming Depends on PROFIBUS DPV1 mas-
ter
MOBY API:
C library for
PC with Win-
dows 98/NT 4.0
Function block
SIMATIC S7
MDS addressing
Commands
Dialog
FC 45
Direct access via addresses
Initialize MDS. Read data from
MDS. Write data to MDS.
No
–
Direct access via
addresses
Initialize MDS.
Read data from
MDS. Write data
to MDS.
No
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
None
None
Voltage supply
Connection plug
Nominal value
Permissible range
Current consumption
Max. switch-on current
4-pole, M12 round plug connector (pin), not included
with the ASM
24 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
250 mA (without SLA)
1.1 A (without SLA)
Ambient temperature
()
During operation
Durin
g
trans
p
ortation
–25° to +55° C (no condensation)
–40° to +85° C
(
no condensation
)
During transportation
and storage
–
40 to +85 C (no condensation)
Housing
Dimensions (L x W x H)
in mm
Material
Color
205 x 130 x 60 (without plug connector)
Aluminum
Anthracite
Technical data
Interfaces
6-58 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-20 Technical data of the ASM 824/850/854
ASM 824ASM 854ASM 850
Mounting
Tightening moment
(at room temperature)
4 M5 screws
Optional: Top hat rail mounting
v 3 Nm
Weight, approx.
Protection rating
1300 g
IP40 (higher ratings on request)
Shock in acc. w.
EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
Vibration in acc. w.
EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
30 g
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
MTBF (at +40 °C) 1 ⋅ 105 hours
Certification CE
RxD
PRE ERR
RxD: SLG active with command
PRE: Presence indicates the presence of an MDS in the transmission window.
ERR: ERR: Error indicated by flashing LED
Plug connectors 1 to 4 to SLA
Socket Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+ 6.6 V
+ Send
+ Receive
CLK +
– Receive
– Send
Ground (0 V)
+ 24 V
CLK –
Hous. Cable shield
12 3 4
Figure 6-44 Serial interfaces of the ASM 824/850/854 to SLA 81
Only one SLA 81 can be connected to the ASM 850.
Pin allocations
and switches
Interfaces
6-59
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
PROFIBUS
Socket Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Not used
Not used
B line (red)
Request to send (RTS)
Ground, 5 V (M5)
Potential, 5 V
Not used
A line (green)
Not used
Housing Cable shield
PROFIBUS
(floating: 60 mA)
SERIAL DC 24 V
ON
1234 67 9 11121085
ON: 24 V present on
(green) ASM
SF/BF: System fault/bus
(red) fault, RAM fault
ASM 824: Flashes
when turned on and
stops when first real
telegram is received.
ACT: This LED flashes
(green) once briefly when a
command is
finished.
Pin Designation
SF/BF
ON ACT
1
2
3
4
Ground
+ 24 V
Ground
+ 24 V
SERIAL
Socket RS 232
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TxD (send)
RxD (receive)
Not used
Not used
Ground (0V)
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
24 V DC
Switches 1 to 7: PROFIBUS address
Switch 1 ON: 20
Switch 2 ON: 21
:
Switch 7 ON: 26
Example: PROFIBUS address = 84
(22 + 24 + 26)
Switch 8: Interface
ON: RS 422
OFF: RS 232
Switches 9 to 12: Free
1
2
34
RS 422
–TxD
–RxD
Not used
Not used
Ground
Not used
Not used
+TxD
+RxD
Housing Cable shield Cable shield
1 Only with ASM 850, ASM 854
2 Only with ASM 824
1
2
2
1
Figure 6-45 Serial interface of ASM 824/850/854 to user
Interfaces
6-60 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
130
205
Grounding
bolt, M4
Figure 6-46 Drawing of ASM 824/850/854 with mounting holes
3
4
5
1
2
Item Designation Quantity
1 Floor plate 1
2 Profile section 1
3 Oval head screw
(M5 x 10)
4
4 Washer (A5.3) 4
5 Countersunk
screw (M4 x 10)
2
Figure 6-47 Drawing of adapter floor plate
Note
The profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90° and mounted on the floor
plate to allow for adjustment to the actual situation.
Dimensions
(in mm)
Adapter floor plate
for top hat rail
mounting
Interfaces
6-61
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6.8 Serial Interface Module – SIM
6.8.1 Overview
The serial interface module (i.e., SIM) is the communication interface to al-
most all host computer systems, PCs, controllers of other manufacturers, and
the mobile data memory (i.e., MDS).
The serial interface module (SIM) primarily contains the components of a
read/write device (SLG – see chapter 5.2, field data, table 6-24). In addition,
it is equipped with an expanded communications unit. This permits reliable
transmission of data and commands from the host system to the SIM.
AT-comp. PC
SIM 80 ANT F5
RS 232
MOBY F
SIEMENS
230V
24V
Figure 6-48 Example of a configuration for SIM
Application area
Layout and
function
Interfaces
6-62 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The 2-kbit EEPROM of the transponder is divided into 16 blocks. Each block
has 4 pages. One page is the smallest unit which can be accessed. One page
consists of 4 8-bit bytes.
Block access is only available for blocks 8 to 15. Page access is available for
pages 1 to 63. The serial number and key A and key B cannot be read with
ReadPage.
Table 6-21 Memory organization for SIM 80 ANT F5 with MDS F4xx
Block Page Address in
Memory
Proces-
sing 1
Access Description
0 0 0 to 3 ro Public ID number (serial number, fixed code)
14 to 7 r/w or ro Configuration
28 to 11 wo
or
Key A
312 to 15 or
0Key B
1 4 16 to 19
/
Secret Protocol data 1B
520 to 23 r/w
or
Secret
Protocol data 0A
624 to 27
or
0Protocol data 1A
728 to 31 Protocol data 0B
2-3 8 to 15 32 to 63 r/w or
OTP
Secret User data
4-7 16 to 31 64 to 127 r/w or
OTP
Secret
or
public
Read/write memory can be used as desired for user data.
This area can be configured with SIM ANT F5 (pass-
word assignment).
8-15 32 to 63 128 to 255 r/w Public Read/write memory can be used as desired for user data.
This area cannot be configured.
Areas (or settings) with light gray backgrounds can be specified by the OEM
customer with the configuration page (page 1).
Table 6-22 Memory organization for SIM 82 with MDS F4xx
Block Page Address in
Memory
Proces-
sing 1
Access Description
0 0 0 to 3 ro Public ID number (serial number, fixed code)
4-7 16 to 31 64 to 127 r/w Public Read/write memory which can be used as desired for user
data.
8-15 32 to 63 128 to 255 r/w Public Read/write memory which can be used as desired for user
data (block access also possible starting at address 128).
1 ro Read only
r/w Read/write
wo Write only
OTP One-time programmable memory
0 Read and write not permitted
Memory is configured with the configuration page.
Data structure of
the MOBY F data
memory MDS F4xx
Interfaces
6-63
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Memory locations marked as “secret” cannot be accessed until both sides
have proven their identities. Encrypted data communication is used for this.
Memory locations marked as “public” can be accessed without both sides
proving their identities. Data are not encrypted.
Block 0 contains the unique serial number (programmed during the produc-
tion process), the configuration page (i.e., the configuration of the memory
area) and the key. Block 1 contains the protocol data.
Blocks 4 to 7 can be configured as secret or public areas, and blocks 2 to 7
can be used as read/write or read-only areas. In addition, you can modify key
and protocol data to prevent access to these data.
The configuration page itself can also be write-protected (i.e., it can be con-
figured as a read-only area).
Be extremely careful when programming the configuration page (you can
only set up write protection once) for keys and protocol data since a mis-
take may cause you to lose access to the secret area of the transponder.
Note
Modification of the configuration page (page 1), keys and protocol data
must take place in a defined environment. While programming is being
performed, the transponder may not leave the communication field of
the antenna! We recommend placing the transponder in the vicinity of
the antenna (no space in between) and leaving it there during program-
ming.
Data areas which are marked as secret on the MDS F4xx can only be ac-
cessed in password mode. Access to a public page while in password mode
is prevented with an error message. The mode is then automatically reset to
crypto. Password mode must be re-activated before protected pages can be
accessed again.
Writing the configuration with WritePage() to an MDS F4xx data memory
may cause the entire data carrier to be lost. If the antenna malfunctions
while the data carrier is being written, the page (4 bytes) on the data carrier
is set to “FF” (FORMAT in EPROM), and the data write procedure is no
longer performed. Several bits are then set to 1. The data carrier can now
only be recognized with GetSnr(). All other accesses create an error.
If an error occurs during communication, the particular data memory is no
longer selected. The data carrier must be selected again with GetSnr() and
SelectLast().
Interfaces
6-64 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Collision protection
There is no collision protection. More than one MDS will cause an error mes-
sage. They either won’t be read or they will cause a mixture of data from
both MDSs.
Operating mode
The MDS F4xx is run in standard protocol mode. This mode is specified by
user command and not in the configuration page.
The standard protocol mode is activated with the GetSnr command.
Compatibility
Since the MDS F4xx is compatible with the HITAG system, these MDSs can
always be processed with the read head of the hand-held terminal.
Configuration
The configuration page has 4 configuration bytes. The first two bytes are
used for the configuration while the other two bytes can be used as desired.
Configuration bytes 0 and 1
The bits in configuration bytes 0 and 1 are used to configure the memory.
This is how you define which area is to be public or private, read/write, read-
only or no read/write accesses at all.
You can assign the configuration page and write-access it until it is inhibited
(bit 4 of configuration byte 1 is set to 0). After this byte has been write-pro-
tected once (i.e., specified as a read-only area), you can never change the
configuration of the transponder memory again.
Interfaces
6-65
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
67 45 23 01
Block 7:
“1” = r/w
“0” = ro
Block 6:
Block 5:
Block 4:
Block 3:
Block 2:
Key A and B:
Protocol data
in block 1:
“1” = wo
“0” = Access to key is not possible.
“1” = r/w
“0” = Access to protocol data is
not possible.
Abbreviations used
r/w Read and write operations are permitted.
ro Only read operations are permitted.
wo Only write operations are permitted.
Figure 6-49 Configuration byte 0
67 45 23 01
Access type for
blocks 4 to 7:
“0” = secret
“1” = public
Reserved
OEM inhibit bit: “0” = Configuration page is ro.
“1” = Configuration page is r/w.
Reserved
Abbreviations used
r/w Read and write operations are permitted.
ro Only read operations are permitted.
Figure 6-50 Configuration byte 1
Note
When you write a new value to configuration byte 1, do not change the bit
positions marked as reserved. To meet this requirement, read the current
value from configuration byte 1 and indicate the new values for the bit posi-
tions which you want to change.
Interfaces
6-66 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Configuration bytes 2 and 3
These two bytes are also write-protected by the OEM inhibit bit (configura-
tion byte 1/bit 4 = 0). Except for this, you can use these two bytes as desired.
They have no effect on the memory configuration. For instance, OEM cus-
tomers can store their own OEM serial numbers there.
Configuration of delivered MDS F4xx devices
MDS F4xx transponders are configured by Siemens with the following de-
fault configuration.
Table 6-23 Configuration of the delivered MDS F4xx transponders
Page MDS Address, Type Value Configurability
Unique serial number 0Serial number Write-protected Permanently set
Configuration byte 0 1Protocol data
Keys A/B
Blocks 2 to 7
‘1’ = r/w
‘1’ = wo
‘1’ = r/w
Can be changed.
Can be changed.
Can be changed.
Configuration byte 1 1OEM inhibit bit
Blocks 4 to 7
‘1’ = Conf. page is r/w.
‘1’ = public
Can be changed.
Can be changed.
Value for transport key,
transport protocol data
2
3
Key A
Key B
00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00
Can be changed,
but not with the hand-
held terminal read head.
Personalization
The MDS F4xx can only be personalized with the SIM 80 ANT F5 (not with
the hand-held terminal read head).
The unique 40-bit serial number of the transponder and 24 bits for the header
and parity are stored in the 64-bit memory. The data are write-protected and
cannot be changed.
Since the MDS F1xx is compatible with data memory EM 4002, these data
memories can also be read with the read head of the hand-held terminal.
Data structure of
the MOBY F data
memory MDS F1xx
Interfaces
6-67
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The following table shows the field data of all MOBY F components of the
MDS and SIM. The information in the table makes it particularly easy to
select the correct MDS and SIM.
All technical data are typical data and are valid at an ambient temperature of
0° to +50° C, a supply voltage of 22 V to 27 V DC, and a metal-free environ-
ment. Tolerances of + 20% are permitted due to manufacturing and tem-
perature factors.
Additional tolerances apply to the field data when the total voltage range of
20 V to 30 V DC is utilized on the SIM and/or the total temperature range is
utilized on the MDS and SIM.
Table 6-24 Field data of all MDSs and SIMs without effects of metal
MDS
SIM
MDS F124 MDS F125 MDS F160 MDS F415
Length of the transmission window in mm (L)
SIM 80 ANT F5 280 280 230 280
SIM 82 ∅ 70 ∅ 70 ∅ 40 ∅ 70
Width of the transmission window in mm (W)
SIM 80 ANT F5 110 110 92 110
SIM 82 30 30 16 30
Working distance in mm (Sa)
SIM 80 ANT F5 0 to 240 0 to 380 0 to 140 0 to 300
SIM 82 0 to 65 0 to 110 0 to 60 0 to 90
Limit distance in mm (Sg)
SIM 80 ANT F5 280 420 160 340
SIM 82 80 140 70 110
Note
For effects of metal on the transmission window, see chapter 3.4.2.
Table 6-25 Minimum distance from MDS to MDS
MDS
F124
MDS
F125
MDS
F160
MDS
F415
SIM 80 with ANT F5 w 1 m w 1 m w 1 m w 1 m 1
SIM 82 w 0.3 m w 0.4 m w 0.3 m w 1 m
1 The minimum distance can be reduced for SIM 80 ANT F5 in multi-tag operation. The
MDSs may be located next to each other, but overlapping is not permitted.
Field data of
MDS and SIM
Interfaces
6-68 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-26 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS F4xx (r/w)
SIM 80 with ANT F5 SIM 82
SIM 80 with ANT F5 w 5 m w 2 m
SIM 82 w 2 m w 1.2 m
Table 6-27 Minimum distance from antenna to antenna with MDS F1xx (r/o)
SIM 80 with ANT F5 SIM 82
SIM 80 with ANT F5 w 1.5 m w 1 m
SIM 82 w 1 m w 0.4 m
Note
The values listed in tables 6-26 and 6-27 must be adhered to. Non-adher-
ence would affect the inductive fields. Data transmission time would in-
crease to an unknown value, or a command would be terminated with errors.
A test is recommended in critical applications.
6.8.2 Cable and Plug Connector Allocation
The 9-pole subminiature D plug connector (pin on device side) is used for the
following purposes.
SConnection to the PC/computer
SConnection of the input and output
Table 6-28 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D (pin housing side)
Pin Designation
RS 232
1Cable shield
2TxD (Send)
3RxD (Receive)
4Digital input2
5Ground (0V)
6Not used
7Not used
8Cable shield
9Digital output (24 V DC, max. 0.5 A ohmic load) 1
1 Logical “0”: < 2 V on 50 Ω / logical “1”: 22 V on 50 Ω
2 Logical “0”: – 2 V < log 0 < 0.8 V / logical “1”: 3 V < log 1 < 30 V
!Caution
If metallized sub D housings are used on the SIM side, the housing must be
connected to the cable shield.
9-pole submin D plug
connector with screw-
type lock
Plug connector on
SIM 80 ANT F5
Interfaces
6-69
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-29 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D (socket housing side)
Socket Designation
RS 232 RS 422
1Not used Not used
2TxD (send) D- (send)
3RxD (receive) E- (receive)
4Not used Not used
5Ground (0 V) Ground (0 V)
6Not used Not used
7Not used Not used
8Not used D+ (send)
9Not used E+ (receive)
Housing Cable shield Cable shield
Table 6-30 Plug connector allocation of the 9-pole submin D1
(socket housing side)
Socket Designation
1+6.6 Volt
2+ Send
3+ Receive
4CLK +
5- Receive
6- Send
7Ground (0 V)
8+24 Volt
9CLK -
Housing Cable shield
1 This plug connector allocation is valid for SIM 82 <=> SLA 81.
9-pole submin D plug
connector with screw-
type lock
“SERIAL” plug connector
on SIM 82
9-pole submin D plug
connector with screw-
type lock
Plug connector on SIM 82
Interfaces
6-70 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-31 Plug connector allocation of SLA plug connector1 (pin housing side)
Pin Designation
1+6.6 Volt
2+ Send
3+ Receive
4CLK +
5- Receive
6- Send
7CLK -
8Ground (0 V)
1 This plug connector allocation is valid for SLA 81 <=> SIM 82.
Table 6-32 Plug connector allocation of 4-pole voltage supply plug connector (pin
housing side)
Pin Designation
1Ground (0 V)
2+ 24 V
3+ 24 V
4Ground (0 V)
SLA 81
Plug connector on SLA 81
View of top
1
6
5
4
8
7
3
2
Voltage supply plug con-
nector on SIM 80/82
View of top
1
4
2
3
Interfaces
6-71
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The voltage supply of the SIM is provided by a 4-pole plug connector.
It is essential to consider the voltage drop on the supply cable.
The permissible length of the voltage supply cable depends on the current
consumption of the SIM and on the ohmic resistance of the connection cable.
Table 6-33 Voltage supply of the SIM
SIM 80 ANT F5 SIM 82
Nominal value 24 V DC 24 V DC
Permissible range 20 to 30 V
(as measured on the plug
connector of the SIM)
20 to 30 V
(as measured on the plug
connector of the SIM)
Current consumption
Startup current
At 24 V
1.5 A
0.6 A (without DO)
1.1 A (with DO)
1.1 A
0.25 A
–
Table 6-34 Max. ripple of the supply voltage for SIM 80 ANT F5 (based on fre-
quency range)
fripple (kHz) Uripple max. (mV RMS)
fripple t 0.5 48
0,5 v fripple t 20 7
20 v fripple t 120 36
120 v fripple t 130 12
fripple u 130 48
Note
For SIM 80 ANT F5
When a switching power pack is used, make sure that the switching fre-
quency is in the range of 160 kHz < fswitch < 200 kHz.
Voltage supply –
SIM
Interfaces
6-72 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
SIM Computer
TxD
RxD
Pin 1 Cable length
max. of 30 m
TxD
RxD
Pin 1
1
1Caution:
If metallized sub D housings are used on the SIM side, the housing must
be connected to the cable shield.
Figure 6-51 Standard cabling for computer/SIM 80 ANT F5, RS 232
SIM Computer
TxD
RxD
Cable length
(max. of 30 m)
TxD
RxD
1
1Caution:
If metallized sub D housings are used on the SIM side, the housing must
be connected to the cable shield.
Pin 1 Pin 1
Figure 6-52 Standard cabling for computer/SIM 82, RS 232
The SIM is equipped with a standard RS 232 (V.24) interface with the signal
lines on pins 2 and 3.
V.24 controller lines (e.g., DSR, DTR, RTS and CTS) are not supported by
SIM. Acknowledgment of the data is performed at the procedure level.
Standard cabling
for SIM 80 ANT F5
with the RS 232
interface
Standard cabling
for SIM 82 with
RS 232 interface
Interfaces
6-73
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
SIM Computer
TxD
RxD
E–
D+
D–
E+
Cable length
(max. of 1000 m)
Pin 1
1) Apply shield to plug connector housing.
1)
Figure 6-53 Standard cabling for computer/SIM 82, RS 422
SIM
1
230 V AC
24 V DC
–+
DI
Imax = 0.5 A
DO
Max. cable length: 100 m
(shielded or unshielded)
Pin 1
4
2
3
1
1Caution:
If metallized sub D housings are used on the SIM side, the housing must
be connected to the cable shield.
Figure 6-54 DI/DO cabling with voltage supply for SIM 80 ANT F5
Standard cabling
for SIM 82 with
RS 422 interface
DI/DO cabling
for SIM 80 ANT F5
with voltage
supply
Interfaces
6-74 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6.8.3 Programming the SIM Module
Communication on the serial interface between the SIM and the host com-
puter system is handled by the ASCII protocol. The telegrams are protected
with a BCC (i.e., Block Check Character). For a description of the protocol,
see the applicable programming guide.
A C library (MFWAPI for Windows 95/NT 4.0) and programming guide (see
chap. 7.1) are available to the user for the computer.
PC user
The SIM is connected to a serial interface of the computer.
Windows 95/NT 4.0 users use PC interface COM1 and/or COM2. Using
additional hardware, 4 interfaces can be provided. Can be run on PC models
starting with processor 80486 SX with serial interface and a Windows 95/
NT 4.0 operating system.
For computers which do not use Windows (e.g., UNIX), see the communica-
tion specifications from the Windows 95/NT 4.0 programming guide. See
appendix A for order number.
a) Check supply voltage with a measuring instrument directly on the SIM
plug connector.
b) Check the cabling to the computer.
SDo SIM and computer have the same physical interface?
SIs the polarity of the connection cable (RS 232 or RS 422) correct?
RxD of SIM must be connected to TxD of computer, or vice versa.
SIs the cable shield correctly installed?
The error messages are described in the individual programming guides.
When the distance to the SIM is too short, check the following.
SPower pack/switching power pack (see chap. 3.5 for interference)
SAre monitors or other sources of interference in the vicinity (see
chap. 3.5)?
SIs metal in the immediate vicinity (see chap. 3.4)?
What do I do if
nothing works ?
Error messages
Distance to SIM
is too short
Interfaces
6-75
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6.8.4 SIM 80 ANT F5
The SIM 80 with ANT F5 meets the primary technical requirements of the
SLG 80 with ANT F5. Use of an ASCII protocol for communication permits
the use of computer systems, PCs and controllers of other manufacturers.
In addition, the SIM 80 permits use of the expanded functions of the
EEPROM-MDS (MDS F4xx) such as selective read and write-accesses to
several MDSs in the transmission window (i.e., pileup recognition and multi-
tag function). The EEPROM-MDS (MDS F4xx) also offers cryptographic
and password functions for data protection. These functions can only be used
in combination with the SIM 80. See appendix A of the programming
guides.
Figure 6-55 SIM 80 ANT F5 serial interface module
Table 6-35 Ordering data for the SIM 80 ANT F5
SIM 80 ANT F5 serial interface module
(Counter plug for supply voltage is in-
cluded.)
6GT2 405-0AF00
Stub lines and accessories See chapter 3.7.
Software See chapter 7.1.
Programming guide See appendix A.
Application area
Ordering data
Interfaces
6-76 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-36 Technical data of SIM 80 ANT F5
Inductive interface to MDS
Max. read/write distances, SIM-MDS 420 mm (see field data)
Transmission frequency 125 kHz
Serial interface RS 232
Procedure ASCII protocol
Data transmission speed 9600 baud
Data line length (max.) 30 m
Line length, antenna 12 m
(can be plugged in on SIM side)
Software functions
Programming
C libraries available for PC
Read, write, initialize MDS, access
rights and multi-tag.
See programming guide.
Depends on computer, PC or PLC
of other manufacturer
MFWAPI (for Windows 95/
NT 4.0)
Supply voltage
(via separate power plug connector)
Nominal value
Permissible range
24 V DC, linear regulated power
pack or clock-pulsed switching
power pack (160 to 200 kHz)
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption at room temperature with-
out DO
Switchon current, brief
Operation (at 24 V)
Max. of 1.5 A
600 mA (typical)
Digital inputs 1
Digital outputs 1
MTBF 1 x 105 hours
Housing
Dimensions (in mm)
For antennas (L x W x H)
For electronics w/o plug (L x W x H)
Color Antenna
SLG housing
Material Antenna
SLG housing
Plug connection (data)
Plug connection (Supply voltage:
counter plug is included with the SIM.)
350 x 350 x 20
320 x 145 x 100
Anthracite
Anthracite
Aluminum
Aluminum
9-pole submin plug connector
(pin on device side)
M12 4-pole device plug connector
(IP65)
Technical data
Interfaces
6-77
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-36 Technical data of SIM 80 ANT F5
Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529
SIM housing
Antenna
Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2
Total shock-response spectrum, type II
Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7, class 7M2
IP652
IP65
30 g
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Mounting of SIM
Mounting of antenna
Turning moment (at room temperature)
4 M6 screws
Min. of 4 M6 screws
v 3 Nm
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
–25° to +60° C
–40° to +85° C
Weight (SIM) Approx. 3600 g
Weight (antenna) Approx. 1200 g
1Note:
The antenna is prefabricated. Any changes to the cable will cancel the warranty and the
CE/BZT certification.
2 IP65 with special plug 6GT2 490-1AA00 (see chap. 7.2)
Table 6-37 Field data of SIM 80 ANT F5
Operating distance (Sa)
Limit distance (Sg)
Transmission window (L)
Minimum distance from ANT F5 to ANT F5 (D)
0 to 380 mm (See table 6-24.)
420 mm (See table 6-24.)
280 mm (See table 6-24.)
See figure 6-58.
Field data
Interfaces
6-78 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
!Warning
Do not make changes on the devices.
Violation will invalidate interference emission certification (FCC) and the
manufacturer ’s warranty.
Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
SReorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
SIncrease the separation between the equipment and receiver.
SConnect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
SConsult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
!Caution
Use of a shielded cable for any kind of connection cable is absolutely
necessary.
The cable shield must be secured with a shield clamp directly on the inter-
face module and grounded via a grounding rail.
FCC information
Interfaces
6-79
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
Sg
View of side
Transmission window MDS
View of top
SIM 80 ANT F5
Sa
L
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓÓÓ
Metal plate (spacing kit)
Figure 6-56 Transmission window of the SIM 80 ANT F5
Metal-free space with flush installation
a = 100 mm
a
Metal
a
a
a
h = 100 mm (non-metallic spacer holder)
Figure 6-57 Metal-free space for SIM 80 ANT F5
Transmission
window
Metal-free space
Interfaces
6-80 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Da
Db
SIM 80
ANT F5
SIM 80
ANT F5
SIM 80
ANT F5 Da ≥ 1.5 m (for r/o) / ≥ 5 m (for r/w)
Db ≥ 1.5 m (for r/o) / ≥ 5 m (for r/w)
Figure 6-58 Distance D for SIM 80 ANT F5
Definition of
distance D
Interfaces
6-81
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Anti-kink cable protector, flexible in all directions
Minimum
bending radius:
20 mm
Cable length
2 m
350
145
320
10
7
125
12
7
280
280
A
View A
100
25
52.5
Note
The SIM must be grounded on the grounding screw1 provided.
1
290
40
25
20
140
Figure 6-59 Dimensional diagram of SIM 80 ANT F5
See chap. 5.2.
Dimensions
(in mm)
Spacer Kit for
MOBY F ANT F5
Interfaces
6-82 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
6.8.5 SIM 82
The SIM 82 is a serial interface module in the medium–end performance
range with a remote antenna. An ASCII protocol for communication permits
use with computer systems, PCs and controllers of other manufacturers. The
maximum cable length between antenna and evaluation unit is 55 m.
The antenna head can be positioned very precisely for every application with
the two screw nuts. The SIM 82 can be run on PC, SICOMP and controllers
of other manufacturers.
The connection cable from the antenna to the evaluation unit is included with
the SIM 82 (length: 5 m).
Figure 6-60 Serial interface module SIM 82
Table 6-38 Ordering data for SIM 82
SIM 82 serial interface module
with serial interface RS 232/RS 422;
ASCII protocol for PC, SICOMP and
other controllers; with one SLA 81.
6GT2 405-2CB00
Stub lines and accessories
Programming guide
Software
See chapter 3.7.
See appendix A.
See chapter 7.1.
Table 6-39 Technical data of SIM 82
Inductive interface to the MDS
Read/write distances, SIM-MDS, max. 140 mm (see field data)
Transmission frequency 125 kHz
Serial interface to computer
Procedure
RS 232/RS 422
ASCII protocol
Data transmission speed 9600 baud
Data line length to computer, max. 30 m
Application
area
Ordering data
Technical data
Interfaces
6-83
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-39 Technical data of SIM 82
Line length to antenna Max. of 55 m
(can be connected on both sides)
Software functions
MDS addressing
Commands
Direct access via addresses
Read, write, initialize MDS
Special functions (e.g., access rights,
multi-tag) are not available for the
SIM 82. See programming guide.
Programming Depends on computer, PC, PLC of other
manufacturer
The following C libraries are available for
the PC
Dialog
MFWAPI (for Windows 95/NT 4.0)
No
Digital inputs
Digital outputs
None
None
Voltage supply
Nominal value
Permissible range
Via separate power plug (not included
with the SIM 82)
24 V DC
20 to 30 V DC
Current consumption
Switch-on current, brief
Operation (with 24 V DC)
Max. of 1.1 A
250 mA (typical)
MTBF (at +40 °C) 1 x 105 hours
Housing
Dimensions (in mm)
Antenna with threading and plug
(∅ x L)
Threading on plug side
(∅ x incline x L)
Electronics without plug (L x W x H)
Color Antenna
SIM housing
Material Antenna
SIM housing
Plug connection
Data
Electronics ↔ antenna
Voltage supply
65 x 90
M30 x 1.5 x 40
205 x 130 x 60
Anthracite/pastel turquoise
Anthracite
Krastin
Aluminum
9-pole, submin. D plug connector
(socket on device side)
9-pole, submin. D plug connector on
SIM housing (socket)
8-pole M12 on antenna (pin)
4-pole M12 on SIM housing (pin)
Protection rating in acc. w. EN 60529
SIM housing
Antenna
Shock in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/class 7M2
Total shock-response range, type II
Vibration in acc. w. EN 60721-3-7/
class 7M2
IP40 (higher ratings on request)
IP65
30 g
1 g (9 to 200 Hz)
1.5 g (200 to 500 Hz)
Interfaces
6-84 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 6-39 Technical data of SIM 82
Mounting of SIM
Tightening moment at 20° C
Mounting of antenna
4 M5 screws
v3 Nm
2 plastic nuts, M30 x 1.5
Ambient temperature
Antenna During operation
During transportation
and storage
SIM housing During operation
During transportation
and storage
–25° C to +70° C
–40° C to +85° C
–25° C to +55° C
(no condensation)
–40° C to +85° C
(no condensation)
Weight (without connection cable)
SIM
Antenna
1300 g
150 g
Table 6-40 Field data of SIM 82
Working distance (Sa)
Limit distance (Sg)
Diameter of transmission window (Ld)
Minimum distance from SLA to SLA (D)
0 to 110 mm
140 mm
∅ 70 mm
See figure 6-63.
View of top
View of side
Transmission window
Ld
sg
sa
Ld
Figure 6-61 Transmission window of SIM 82
Field data
Transmission
window
Interfaces
6-85
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
MOBY F
20
View of side
20
40
View of top
Note:
Non-adherence to metal-free space will reduce limit
and working distances.
SLA 81
6GT2 401-2BB00
Metal-free space
with flush installa-
tion
Figure 6-62 Metal-free space for SIM 82
Metal-free space
Interfaces
6-86 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Da w 400 mm (for MDS F1xx) / w 1.2 m (for MDS F4xx)
Db w 800 mm (for MDS F1xx) / w 2.4 m (for MDS F4xx)
Db
Da
Figure 6-63 Distance D: SIM 82
RxD
PRE ERR
RxD: SIM active with command
PRE: Presence indicates the presence of an MDS in the transmission window
(only valid when a command is queued).
ERR: Error indicated by flashing LED
Plug connector to SLA
Socket Designation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+ 6.6 V
+ Send
+ Receive
CLK +
– Receive
– Send
Ground (0 V)
+ 24 V
CLK –
Hous. Cable shield
Figure 6-64 Serial interface of SIM 82 to SLA 81
Definition of
distance D
Pin allocations
and switches
Interfaces
6-87
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
SERIAL DC 24 V
ON
1234 67 9 11121085
Pin Designation
SF/BF
ON ACT
1
2
3
4
Ground
+ 24 V
Ground
+ 24 V
SERIAL
Socket RS 232
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TxD (send)
RxD (receive)
Not used
Not used
Ground (0V)
Not used
Not used
Not used
24 V DC
1
2
34
RS 422
–TxD
–RxD
Not used
Not used
Ground
Not used
Not used
+TxD
+RxD
Housing Cable shield Cable shield
ON: 24 V present on
(green) SIM
SF/BF: System fault/
(red) bus fault,
RAM fault
ACT: This LED goes on
(green) while a command
is being executed.
Switches 1 to 7: Reserved
Switch 8: Interface setting
ON: RS 422
OFF: RS 232
Switch 9: MDS parameterization
ON: MDS 1xx (r/o)
OFF: MDS 4xx (r/w)
Switch 10: Firmware download
ON: Download
OFF: Operation
Switch 11, 12: Not used
Not used
Figure 6-65 Serial interface of SIM 82 to user
Interfaces
6-88 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
130
205
Grounding
bolt, M4
Figure 6-66 Dimensional drawing of the SIM 82 housing
Antenna side
Mounting nuts
8-pole plug (M 12)
∅ 65
Threading
(M30 x 1.5)
25
12
40
90
∅ 34
Figure 6-67 Dimensional drawing of antenna for SIM 82 (SLA 81)
Dimensions
(in mm)
Interfaces
6-89
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
3
4
5
1
2
Item Designation Quantity
1 Floor plate 1
2 Profile section 1
3 Oval head screw
(M5 x 10)
4
4 Washer (A5.3) 4
5 Countersunk
screw (M4 x 10)
2
Figure 6-68 Drawing of mounting of adapter floor plate
Note
The profile section (item 2) can be turned by 90° and mounted to allow for
adjustment to the actual situation.
Adapter floor plate
for top hat rail
mounting
Interfaces
6-90 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Interfaces
7-1
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Accessories 7
7-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
7.1 MOBY Software
Starting with version 3.0, the “MOBY Software” product is delivered on a
CD. All function blocks and drivers for MOBY are included. The
“Les_mich” (i.e., read_me) file on CD gives a brief explanation of the pro-
grams listed below.
SFB 240: Function block for ASM 450; MOBY on PROFIBUS DP with
SIMATIC S5 (including master device file for PROFIBUS DP)
SFB 250: Function block for ASM 400
SFB 41 contains a function block for the ASM 410. The call interface of
this function block is almost identical to that of FB 250. See the descrip-
tion of FB 250 for programming.
SFC 44 permits the ASM 450 to be used in a SIMATIC S7 environment.
Be sure to read the “Read_me” file in the FC 44 directory carefully.
See description of “FC 44 for ASM 450” for use of the ASM 450.
SFC 45: S7 function for ASM 850, ASM 854
SFunction FC 47 for ASM 470
SFB 47 contains a function block for the SIMATIC S5-115U to 155U. It
permits the ASM 470 to be used in a SIMATIC S5 environment with an
ET 200M.
STest and demonstrator programs for presenting the functions (e.g., “read
from MDS”, “write to MDS” and so on) on a PC (Windows). MOBY
modules ASM or SIM are connected by a cable (serial interface) to the
PC (i.e., COM1 or COM2).
SBrief explanations of the individual directories in German or English. Cf.
“les_mich.txt” or “read_me.txt”.
S3964R driver for DOS, Windows 95 and Windows NT
SC library (MFWAPI) for Windows 95/NT 4.0
(for SIM 82/SIM 80 ANT F5)
SC library (MOBY API) for Windows 98/NT 4.0 (for ASM 824)
SLatest version of MOBY documentation as PDF file
STools. Helpful programs for the MOBY configuration
A
ccessories
7-3
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The “Software MOBY” CD contains a user-friendly operator guide based on
HTML. After Start.exe is called, a screen appears with the following main
items in the top menu line.
SFC for S7
SFB for S5
SPC Support
SDocu
STools
SDemo
SNews
Note
Information on MOBY software or licensing
The purchase price of an interface module or SIM does not include software
or documentation. The “Software MOBY” CD-ROM which includes all
available FBs/FCs for SIMATIC, C libraries for Windows 98/NT, demo pro-
grams, and so on must be ordered separately. Furthermore, the CD-ROM
contains the complete MOBY documentation (in German, English and
French) in PDF format.
The purchase price of an interface module or SIM includes the price for uti-
lization of the software including documentation on the “Software MOBY”
CD-ROM, and the purchaser is granted the right to make copies (copy li-
cense) to the extent required by the customer-specific application or devel-
opment for the system.
In addition, the enclosed contract covers the use of software products in
return for a one-time payment.
Operator guide
A
ccessories
7-4 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The import library is written in C++.
The following functions are supported.
SRead MDS
SInitialize MDS
SWrite MDS
SPassword protection and access rights (not SIM 82)
SMulti-tag recognition (not SIM 82)
The import library is written in C++.
The following functions are supported.
SRead MDS
SInitialize MDS
SWrite MDS
Driver software is available for the 3964R protocol.
The programming guide is included as a PDF file on the “Software MOBY”
CD.
Table 7-1 Ordering data for MOBY software
Order No.
Software MOBY 6GT2 080-2AA10
C library,
MFWAPI for
SIM 80/82
C library,
MOBY API for
ASM 824
Ordering data
A
ccessories
7-5
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
7.2 MOBY Wide Range Power Pack
The MOBYR wide range power pack is a compact, primary-pulsed power
supply. It is designed for use on single-phase, alternating current networks
with two DC outputs (socket connector, circuited in parallel).
Its robust physical characteristics include an aluminum housing which gives
the finely-tuned system physical strength, protection against electromagnetic
interference and optimum heat dissipation.
A built-in power limitation circuit protects the primary-pulsed power supply
against overload and short circuiting.
The standard model has overvoltage protection (SIOV) which protects the
connected electronics against excessive voltage.
Figure 7-1 MOBY wide range power pack
Table 7-2 Ordering data for MOBY wide range power pack
Order No.
MOBY wide range power pack,
100 to 230 V AC/24 V DC/2.2 A,
incl. 2 counterplugs for the output voltage
24 V stub line for ASM 824/850/854,
SLG 80/82, SIM 80/82; length: 5 m
6GT2 494-0AA00
6GT2 491-1HH50
Table 7-3 Technical data of MOBY wide range power pack
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Ñ
ÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑÑ
Input
Input voltage
Nominal value
Range
Frequency
Input current
Efficiency
Power connection
Power failure bypass
Undervoltage switch-off
Overvoltage protection
100 to 230 V AC
90 to 253 V AC
50/60 Hz
0.85 to 0.45 A
w 80 % at full load
2 m power cable with protection
contact plug
w 10 msec
Yes
SIOV
Description
Ordering data
Technical data
A
ccessories
7-6 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 7-3 Technical data of MOBY wide range power pack
Output
Output nominal voltage
Output nominal current
Residual ripple
Startup current limitation
Continuous short circuit proof
Socket contacts
24 V DC
2.2 A
20 mVss Up to 160 kHz
50 mVss Over 160 kHz
NTC
Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature
During operation
During transportation and storage
Ventilation
–20° C to +40° C
(max. of +60° C, see notes on
safety)
–40° C to +80° C
Convection
General specifications
Dimensions of power supply incl. mounting
plate, (L x W x H) in mm
Weight
Color
205 x 80 x 60
(without connection plug)
Approx. 1000 g
Anthracite
Elektromagnetic compatibility
Interference emission (EN 50081-1)
Interference immunity (EN 50082-2)
Class B in acc. w. EN 55022
EN 61000-4-2
Safety
Certifications
Electrical safety check
Galvanic isolation, primary/secondary
Protection class
Protection rating
CE, GS
EN 60950/VDE 0805 and
VDE 106, part 1
4 kV AC
I, in acc. w. EN 60950
(VDE 0805)
IP65 in acc. w. EN 60529 (only
when installed)
2
3
1
4
Output 1 and 2
Socket 1: Ground (0 V)
Socket 2: +24 V DC
Socket 3: +24 V DC
Socket 4: Ground (0 V)
Figure 7-2 Plug connector allocation of 24 V output
Plug connector
allocation of 24 V
output
A
ccessories
7-7
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
80
7.5 65
190
7.5
176
205
573
5 5
Figure 7-3 Dimensions of the MOBY wide range power pack
!Caution
Do not open the devices or modify them.
Non-adherence will invalidate the CE seal and the manufacturer’s warranty.
When installing the power pack, it is essential to comply with the applicable
DIN/VDE regulations or the regulations of your country.
The application area of the power pack is restricted to “information techno-
logical, electrical office machine” covered by standard EN 60950/
VDE 0805.
A device may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel.
For the purposes of the safety notes in this product documentation, qualified
personnel are those persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
tag devices, systems and current circuits in accordance with safety standards.
The device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog
and technical description and only in connection with components and de-
vices recommended and approved by Siemens.
Correct operation of the product is dependent on correct storage, setup and
mounting as well as careful use and maintenance.
When mounting, make sure that the power outlet socket can be accessed
easily. During operation, the housing may heat up up to +40° C. This is no
cause for concern. However, remember that the power pack must be covered
if the ambient temperature exceeds +40° C to prevent people from touching
the hot housing. The power pack must be sufficiently ventilated even when
covered.
Dimensions
(in mm)
Notes on safety
A
ccessories
7-8 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
7.3 MOBY Hand-Held Terminal STG F
The STG F is a powerful, mobile, hand-held terminal for the MOBY F identi-
fication system. It is designed for applications in warehouses, logistics, dis-
tribution and service. The service and test device (STG F) is an indispensable
aid for commissioning and testing. All MOBY F data memories can be in-
ductively read and written.
Figure 7-4 MOBY STG F hand-held terminal
The STG F mobile, hand-held terminal consists of a basic device (Basis
PSION Workaboutmx) and a compact, snap-on read/write head. It is equipped
with a housing which is protected against splashed water (IP54), an LCD dis-
play with 240 x 100 pixels, an alphanumeric keyboard and various interfaces
(for EEPROM card, charge battery, RS 232/TTL for MOBY F read head,
battery charging interface incl. RS 232 for the PC coupling, and so on).
The included MOBY software (memory card) provides the service and test
functions for reading, writing, etc. all MOBY F data memories.
SRead data from data memory
SWrite data to data memory (only r/w MDS F4xx)
SRead and display ID number of data memory
SDisplay and edit data in hexadecimal or ASCII format
SEnable/disable password protection
Using the optional C library as a basis, it is very easy to program your own
applications (including a customized user interface) for reading/writing the
data memories. Also available directly from PSION are various development
tools for the PC and a wide selection of accessories. The device opens up
new applications in the area of logistics and distribution (e.g., commissioning
data can be recorded or edited offline with the hand-held terminal and for-
warded later to the PC/computer).
Application
area
Layout and
function
A
ccessories
7-9
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
For additional information, see Internet under http://www.psion.com/indu-
strial/.
S3link adapter cable to PC for easy exchange of data between PC and
PSION Workaboutmx
SBasic PSION Workaboutmx device with large function keys and numeric
keypad
SExtra memory card with up to 8 Mbytes of memory
SDocking station incl. high-speed charging device and software for easy
data communication between PSION Workaboutmx and PC
The following prerequisites must be provided before the library for SIBO ’C’
(SIBO ’C’ is the C development environment for the PSION Workabout) can
be used.
SPC The “C development package for the PSION
Workabout” must be installed on the PC. The
development package must be obtained directly
from PSION.
(See: http://www.psion.com/industrial/)
SHand-held terminal PSION Workabout with wall holder and power pack.
Use of the MOBY STG F hand-held terminal is
recommended here.
SPC cable You will need a 3link adapter cable (available from
PSION) for the connection to the PC.
See http://www.psion.com/industrial/. The cable is
only required when it is not included in the
C development package.
SC library The following files are required: MOBY_F.H,
MOBY_STG.LIB. They are included with the
MOBY SIBO ’C’ library from Siemens.
Note
Applications can naturally also be developed in the Basic programming lan-
guage OVAL. However, the MOBY library cannot be used.
Optional
components
System
prerequisites
A
ccessories
7-10 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
The following figure shows the primary hardware interfaces with which you
can write your applications.
ASCII keypad, shift and special function keys
(Ctrl, )
Control keys, contrast, display illumination,
on/off, cursor keys
Extra flash memory card for storing large
amounts of data
TTL interface for operation of a
MOBY read head
RS 232 interface
(e.g., connection of a MOBY F SIM)
Graphic LCD display
LIF interface for connection of
PC, printer, etc.
Numeric input block with Enter key
Green LED: Goes on while the battery is be-
ing charged
Figure 7-5 Hardware of the STG F
If you are using a different type of PSION Workabout, other interfaces are
available. Some examples are listed below.
SInfrared interface
SNumeric keyboard and function keys
Hardware
A
ccessories
7-11
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 7-4 Ordering data of STG F
STG F mobile, hand-held terminal
Basic device (PSION Workaboutmx)
with MOBY F read/write head, battery, standard
software incl. STG functions on EEPROM card,
operating instructions, without charging station
Charging station for a mobile hand-held terminal
incl. plug-in power pack (230 V AC)
6GT2 403-0BA00
6GT2 303-1DA00
Accessories:
MOBY F read/write head, 125 kHz without soft-
ware and without description
Memory card with STG software and filehandler
software for MOBY D/E/F/I/U incl. operator’s guide
C library for MOBY D/E/F/I/U for development of
customer-specific screen dialogs, without develop-
ment tools, incl. description
6GT2 403-1BA00
6GT2 303-1CA00
6GT2 381-1AB00
Replacement battery
Other PSION components (e.g., 3link cable,
C development interface)
6GT2 094-0AB00 or
2 AA batteries (NiCd, Ni-MH,
alkali)
Obtain from local dealer or
PSION
(See http://www.psion.com/
industrial/.)
Table 7-5 Technical data for STG F hand-held terminal
Hardware
Processor NED V30mx 27.68 MHz (80C86 compatible)
RAM
(p)
2 MB, approx. 1.8 MB of this can be used as desired
ROM
pp
2 MB for operating system
User program 256 KB (with MOBY service and test program)
Display Graphic LCD with 240 x 100 pixels, gray scales, backlighting
can be enabled
Keyboard
can
b
e
ena
bl
e
d
.
Alphanumeric keypad with 57 keys
Keyboard
Sound
Alphanumeric keypad with 57 keys
Piezo signal encoder
Power supply
Operating time
NiCd battery back with 2 type AA batteries (850 mAh).
High-speed charging, automatic switch-off
20 hours:
read head inactive, display not lighted
4.5 hours:
read head active, display not lighted
10 hours:
read head inactive, display lighted
Interfaces LIF interface (Low Insertion Force) for battery charging and
communication with PC and printer (3link cable not included)
RS 232 and TTL interfaces for connecting a MOBY read head
Security Lock for battery and program memory
Ordering data
Technical data
A
ccessories
7-12 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table 7-5 Technical data for STG F hand-held terminal
Software
Operating system
File management
EPOC/16 multi-tasking, graphics support, GUI interface,
Interpreter similar to MS-DOS
MS-DOS compatible
Integrated software
MOBY STG
program
MOBY service and test program, spreadsheet calculation, data
base, pocket calculator, communication
Read, write, delete MDS. Read MDS ID. Save and load MDS
data. Menu language: German or English. Data entered and
displayed in ASCII or HEX.
Technical data Complete device
(incl. batteries)
Read head
Dimensions 260 x 90 x 35 [mm] 90 x 64 x 35 [mm]
Weight
[]
Approx. 440 g
[]
Approx. 110 g
Temperature Operation: –20° C to +60° C
Storage: 25
°
C to +80
°
C (without battery)
Relative humidit
y
Storage: –25° C to +80° C (without battery)
0% to 90%
,
no condensation
Relative humidity
Protection rating
0% to 90%
,
no condensation
IP54 (protected against splashed water)
g
Shock resistance
(p g p )
Max. height of fall to concrete: 1 m
EMC
Electrostatic; RF;
EN 55022
IEC 801 2; IEC 801 3; IEC 801 4
Electrostatic; RF;
EFT
IEC 801-2; IEC 801-3; IEC 801-4
RF write/read head
MOBY F 125 kHz
Max. read/write
di
MDS type Distance in mm
distances F124
F125
F160
F415
60
80
40
50
A
ccessories
A-1
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Documentation
Starting 10.01.2004, the technical documentation of MOBY is only available
electronically on the “Software MOBY” CD with the order number
6GT2 080-2AA10.
SDescription ASM 400/401 (German/English)
SDescription ASM 410 (German/English)
SDescription ASM 450/FC 44 (German/English/French)
SDescription FC 45 (German/English/French)
SDescription ASM 470/FC 47 for SIMATIC S7 (German/English)
SDescription ASM470/FB 47 for SIMATIC S5 (German/English)
SDescription FB 250 for ASM 400/401 (German/English)
SDescription 3964 R for Windows 95/NT (German/English)
SDescription T3964R for DOS (German/English)
SDescription MOBY API (German/English)
SDescription C-library MFWAPI for Windows 95/NT 4.0
(German/English)
SOperator control guide for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/
German) (also included with STG F)
SProgramming instructions for STG MOBY hand-held terminal (English/
German)
Technical
descriptions
Operator control
guides
A
A-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Documentation
B-1
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Error Messages
This chapter contains a list of MOBY I, E, F error messages. These mes-
sages are divided into two groups.
B.1 Error numbers 01 hex to 1F hex are described in the first section.
These messages are the same for all interfaces which use direct MDS
addressing.
B.2 Some function blocks (e.g., FB 250, FB 240 and FC 47) provide addi-
tional messages on the status of the hardware. These special messages
are description in the second section.
B
B-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
B.1 General Errors
The following error codes can occur during MOBY F operation. They are
transferred in the status byte during telegram communication or indicated on
the red LED on the front panel. This LED indicates the last error (for most
ASMs) even after it has already been corrected.
For ASM 450, the error codes are also optionally reported via PROFIBUS as
device-specific diagnoses.
Table B-1 General errors
Error
Code in
Hex
LED
Indica-
tion
Cause/Remedy
00 00 No error, result is okay.
00 01 The ASM is not yet initialized to the SIMATIC.
Send new start/RESET to ASM.
03 03 Error in connection to the SLG
Supply voltage of ASM < 20 V or not connected
24 V voltage has voltage drops.
use on the ASM has blown.
Check wiring.
Cable between ASM and SLG is wired incorrectly or cable break.
Hardware defect: ASM or SLG
Other SLG is active in the vicinity.
Field interference
05 05 Unknown command code
The MDS reports address error. Check telegram.
Read/write area of MDS requires password.
Encryption or password for this area is wrong.
Data comparison error
Write-access not permitted (write-protected area)
Read-access not permitted (read-protected area)
FFT command with presence check
Mode doesn’t fit command (e.g., MOBY I with FFT command)
Switch setting 4 (INIT) with read/write command (ASM 410)
06 06 Field interference on SLG
SLG is receiving interference from its environment.
External interference field
Distance between two SLGs is too small and does not meet configuration guidelines.
Connection cable to SLG is malfunctioning, is too long or does not meet
specifications.
07 07 Too many sending errors
MDS was unable to correctly receive the command or the write data from the SLG even
after several attempts.
The MDS is positioned exactly on the boundary area of the transmission window.
Data transmission to MDS is being affected by external interference.
Antenna is mounted too close to metal.
Error Messa
g
es
B-3
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table B-1 General errors
Error
Code in
Hex
Cause/RemedyLED
Indica-
tion
08 08 CRC sending error
– Monitor receiving circuit detected an error during sending.
Same cause as error 06
– MDS reports CRC errors very frequently.
MDS is positioned in the boundary area of SLG.
MDS and/or SLG have hardware defect.
09 09 Wrong MDS type for special commands
Set data carrier type with special command (type 3)
0C 12 EEPROM error
Memory of the MDS cannot be written.
MDS was write-accessed too often.
MDS memory defective.
0D 13 Address error (address area exceeded)
Specified address does not exist on MDS.
Check and correct command for telegram layout.
Status byte of command is not 00.
0E 14 ECC error
Data could not be read from MDS.
MDS data have been lost (MDS defective)
MDS was not initialized with ECC driver.
Initialize MDS.
MDS has reached the end of its life, and the data have been lost.
Replace MDS.
While being write-accessed, MDS was moved out of the field or field interference
occurred.
MDS is not positioned correctly.
Remove interference.
0F 01 Startup message of ASM. The ASM was off and still had not received a RESET command.
Perform init_run
The same physical ASM channel is used in two (or more) UDT 10 structures. Check
ASM_address and ASM_channel in all UDT 10 structures.
0F 15 MOBY F driver error
Internal error.
FFT command with MDS F1xx in field.
Telegram from reader cannot be interpreted.
19 25 Previous command active
A new command was sent to the ASM although the last command is still active.
An active command can only be terminated by a RESET command.
The new command is concluded with error 19 hex. The old command is executed by
the ASM and reported as finished after its execution.
1A 26 No data carrier selected or wrong MDS type
MDS type was not set correctly (special commands).
Error Messa
g
es
B-4 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table B-1 General errors
Error
Code in
Hex
Cause/RemedyLED
Indica-
tion
1B 27 Telegram with checksum error received
CRC check for data telegram not okay.
Data distortion.
Interface defective.
Send command again.
1D 29 Insufficient RAM on the ASM
Chained MOBY command must be divided into several commands.
1E 30 Error while processing the function block
Data in FB DB are incorrect.
Perform RESET command.
Parameterization error: The “Typ” parameter is not 1 to 6.
Parameterization error: The command in ZUWDB has an error (e.g., length = 0).
ASM hardware defective: The channel module received incorrect data during RESET.
1F 31 Command aborted due to RESET command
Error Messa
g
es
B-5
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
B.2 ASM-Related Errors
B.2.1 ASM 400 with FB 250
The messages shown in table B-2 are indicated in data word 5 of FBDB.
Table B-2 Error messags of FB 250
Error Message Cause/Remedy
Bit 1 = “1”:
Synchronization error
SFB 250 has received the result for a command which is not located in ZUWDB
(i.e., not at this location). The pointer (ZUW) to ZUWDB may have been
changed while a command was active.
SEMC effects have caused the ASM to execute another command than pro-
grammed by the user.
→ Check the entire SIMATIC system. Check the grounding concept.
Bit 2 = “1”:
FB 250 is synchronized
(SYNCH)
General communication capability with a channel module of the ASM 400 module.
This bit is set after a positive check of the FB parameterization.
This takes place during the 1st RESET immediately after bootstrap loading of the
programs and data blocks. When a RESET command does not function, the bit is
not set or reset.
ASM 400 module cannot be addressed by the FB.
SWrong address set on the ASM 400
SASM 400 is defective.
→ A RESET must always be performed after the sync bit is reset.
Bit 4 = “1”:
Parameterization error
SThe “ADR” parameter does not contain the correct values.
SThe “KAN” parameter is specified incorrectly. Permitted values are 1 or 2.
SThe “TYP” parameter was specified incorrectly. Permitted values are 0, 1, 3, 5,
and 6.
SThe “ANW” parameter is not “0” or “1”.
SThe command is not permitted in ZUWDB.
Bit 5 = “1”:
ASM error
SThe exact ASM error is located in bits 8 to 15 of ANZ.
If bits 8 to 15 = 0:
SThe FB did not receive an acknowledgment from the ASM in time after com-
mand transfer.
SFB 250 was not called by the user within 4 seconds after command start (no
cycle FB call).
SThe user changed data in the FBDB (DW 0 to DW 24) - particularly DW 0/1.
Error Messa
g
es
B-6 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table B-2 Error messags of FB 250
Error Message Cause/Remedy
Bit 6 = “1”:
Time error
Loop counter monitor in FB 250 has been triggered.
SThe command data could not be or could not be completely transferred to the
ASM 400.
SThe ASM 400 cannot be addressed by the FB. The “ADR” parameter may not
correspond to switch setting S3 on the ASM 400.
SLength = 0 was transferred with a write command.
SThe “AG” parameter is set incorrectly.
SThe user has changed data in FBDB (particularly DW 0/1).
→ Check ASM 400 hardware, addressing parameterization and user program.
Bit 7 = “1”:
Repetition error
The command to the ASM 400 was repeated.
SError in BEST = 0
The command was not concluded correctly after command repetition (not an
error).
SError in BEST = 1
Communication malfunction between ASM and FB 250. Despite command
repetition, the command still could not be executed correctly.
When the repetition bit is set sporadically, all hardware must be checked. Special
attention should be paid to the grounding concept.
Bits 8 to 12 Error message as shown in table B-1
Bit 13 = “1” ECC offset was performed.
Bit 14 = “1” Dialog battery has dropped below threshold value.
Bit 15 = “1” RAM battery has dropped below threshold value.
Error Messa
g
es
B-7
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
B.2.2 ASM 470 with FB 47/FC 47
The indication word for FC 47 is DBB 6/7.
The indication word for FB 47 is DW 3.
SMOBY errors are indicated in DBB 6 or DL 3. Cf. table B-1.
SInternal errors of the function block are indicated in DBB 7 or DR 3. Cf.
table B-3. The red LED does not flash for these error messages from
FB 47/FC 47. The contents of the byte are specified in hexadecimal for-
mat (i.e., HEX) and as fixed point numbers (i.e., DEC).
Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47
ANZ
(Right-
Hand
Byte)
Description
02 HEX/
02 DEC
Illegal command code or command parameter was entered.
SParameterize data words in BEDB correctly in accordance with the
command description.
06 HEX/
06 DEC
SThe command code and the received acknowledgment code are not
identical.
SInternal processing error
SBEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
07 HEX/
07 DEC
Synchronization error during execution of FB 47/FC 47
SInternal processing error
SBEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
08 HEX/
08 DEC
The parameterized user data length of the read/write command and the
user data length received in the acknowledgment are not identical.
SASM 470 not parameterized correctly
SBEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
09 HEX/
09 DEC
The received or written user data are too long.
SASM 470 not parameterized correctly
SRead command: The length specified for the data to be read is too
long. Maximum of 12 bytes is permitted.
10 HEX/
10 DEC
Read or written user data length too short. User data length is 0 bytes.
SInternal processing error
SBEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
17 HEX/
17 DEC
The formal operands of FB 47/FC 47 were parameterized incorrectly.
SParameterize FB 47/FC 47 correctly.
SThen start RESET command.
Error Messa
g
es
B-8 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table B-3 Error messages of FB 47/FC 47
ANZ
(Right-
Hand
Byte)
Description
19 HEX/
19 DEC
FB 47/FC 47 reports that only a RESET command is permitted as the next
command.
SNo RESET was performed after a startup message of the ASM 470.
SNo RESET was performed after an error message after which a
RESET must be the next command.
SStart RESET command.
20 HEX/
20 DEC
Synchronization error between ASM 470 and FB 47/FC 47
SThe handshake of the command and acknowledgment telegrams got
out of step. There may be a contact problem or the supply voltage
may be unstable.
SBEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
SStart RESET command.
21 HEX/
21 DEC
ASM 470 has performed a startup.
SThere may be a problem with the plug-in contact of the ASM 470 in
the S7-300.
SSupply voltage of the ASM 470 is unstable.
SInterference pulse
SDEDB is being overwritten by other program segments.
SStart RESET command.
1 BH/
27D1
SThe data field (i.e., number of user data bytes) between DAT-Z and the
end of DATDB is less than the length given in the write command
(DR 4 in BEDB). Exception: DATDB consists of 256 data words
(DW 0 to DW 255).
SDAT-Z must be adjusted to the user data length. Make DAT-Z smaller.
SReduce length of read/write data.
SStart RESET command.
1 Can only occur with FB 47
Error Messa
g
es
B-9
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
B.2.3 ASM 450 with FB 240
The error indications (ANZ) of FB 240 are located in data word DW 2 of the
BEDB.
SThe MOBY errors listed in table B-1 are located in the left-hand byte of
the data word (DL 2).
SInternal FB errors are located in the right-hand byte of the data word
(DR 2). The red LED does not flash for these FB 240 error messages.
The contents of the byte are specified in binary format, in hexadecimal
format (H) and as fixed point numbers (D).
Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240
ANZ
(Right-
Hand
Byte)
Description
00000010
(02H/02D)
Illegal command code or command parameter was entered.
SParameterize data words in BEDB correctly as specified in the
command description.
00000110
(06H/06D)
The command code and the received acknowledgment code are not
identical.
SInput and output area of the ASM 450 is too small.
SParameterize master module correctly.
00000111
(07H/07D)
The received acknowledgment is too long.
SInput and output area of the ASM 450 is too small (i.e., less than
32 bytes).
SRead command: The length of the data to be read is too long.
SParameterize master module correctly.
00001000
(08H/08D)
The parameterized length of the user data of the read/write command
and the user data length received in the acknowledgment are not iden-
tical.
SInput and output area of the ASM 450 is too small.
SParameterize master module correctly.
00001001
(09H/09D)
The length of the received user data is too long.
SInput and output area of the ASM 450 is too small (i.e., less than
32 bytes).
SRead command: The length of the data to be read is too long.
SParameterize master module correctly.
00010001
(11H/17D)
The formal operands of FB 240 were parameterized incorrectly or the
parameterization in the EPROM of IM 308-B is wrong.
SParameterize FB 240 correctly.
SParameterize master module correctly. Check the “ADR” parame-
ter in particular.
SThen start RESET command.
Error Messa
g
es
B-10 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Table B-4 Error messages of FB 240
ANZ
(Right-
Hand
Byte)
Description
00010011
(13H/19D)
FB 240 reports that only a RESET is permitted as the next command.
SNo RESET was performed after a startup message of the
ASM 450.
SNo RESET was performed after an error message which requires a
RESET as the next command.
SStart RESET command.
00010100
(14H/20D)
Synchronization error between ASM 450 and FB 240
SThe handshake of the command and acknowledgment telegrams
got out of step. There may be a contact problem or the supply
voltage may be unstable.
SStart RESET command.
00010101
(15H/21D)
The ASM 450 has performed a startup or a PROFIBUS DP bus error
has occurred.
SPossible problem with the ASM 450’s plug-in contacts in the mod-
ule rack
SSupply voltage of the ASM 450 is unstable.
SInterference pulse on the reset input of base connector X1
SPROFIBUS DP error occurred (e.g., bus connection interrupted)
SStart RESET command.
Error Messa
g
es
C-1
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
ASCII Table C
C-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
A
SCII Table
Index-1
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Index
Numbers
3RX9 802-0AA0, 6-25
3SX6 284, 5-21, 6-55
6ES5 491-0LB11, 6-11
6ES5 700-8MA11, 6-16
6ES5 700-8MA22, 6-16
6ES7 141-1BF11-0XB0, 6-46
6ES7 142-1BD21-0XB0, 6-46
6ES7 194-1AA01-0XA0, 6-25
6ES7 194-1FC00-0XA0, 6-25
6ES7 198-8FA01-8AA0, 6-48
6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0, 6-36, 6-37
6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0, 6-36, 6-37
6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0, 6-37, 6-43
6ES7 972-0BA11-0XA0, 6-55
6GT2 002-0AA00, 6-5
6GT2 002-0AB00, 6-5
6GT2 002-0BA00, 6-16
6GT2 002-0EB00, 6-25
6GT2 002-0EB20, 6-25
6GT2 002-0FA10, 6-37
6GT2 002-0GA10, 6-37
6GT2 002-0HA00, 6-47
6GT2 080-2AA10, 6-5, 6-25, 6-37, 6-47, 7-4
6GT2 090-0BB00, 6-5, 6-8
6GT2 090-0BB10, 6-5
6GT2 090-0BC00, 6-25, 6-29, 6-47
6GT2 091-0E..., 6-43
6GT2 094-0AB00, 7-11
6GT2 303-1CA00, 7-11
6GT2 303-1DA00, 7-11
6GT2 381-1AB00, 7-11
6GT2 390-0BA00, 5-11, 5-15, 6-56
6GT2 390-1AB00, 3-52, 6-55
6GT2 391-0B..., 3-56, 6-55
6GT2 391-0BH50, 3-58
6GT2 391-1AH50, 3-56, 3-58, 6-55, 6-56
6GT2 391-1BN10, 3-57, 3-58, 6-55
6GT2 391-1BN25, 3-57, 3-58, 6-55
6GT2 400-1CE00, 4-4
6GT2 400-1CF00, 4-7
6GT2 400-1GA00, 4-10
6GT2 400-4BF00, 4-13
6GT2 401-0AF00, 5-3
6GT2 401-2AA00, 5-26
6GT2 401-2BB00, 5-21, 6-55
6GT2 401-2CB00, 5-15
6GT2 402-2BB00, 6-55
6GT2 402-2CE00, 6-55
6GT2 402-2EA00, 6-55
6GT2 403-0BA00, 7-11
6GT2 403-1BA00, 7-11
6GT2 405-0AF00, 6-75
6GT2 405-2CB00, 6-82
6GT2 490-1AA00, 3-51, 5-4, 6-77
6GT2 491-0A..., 3-53
6GT2 491-0AH50, 3-58
6GT2 491-0AN20, 3-58
6GT2 491-0D..., 3-53, 6-23
6GT2 491-0DH50, 3-58
6GT2 491-0DN20, 3-58
6GT2 491-0E..., 3-54, 6-36
6GT2 491-0EH50, 3-58, 6-37
6GT2 491-0EN20, 3-58, 6-37
6GT2 491-0EN50, 3-58, 6-37
6GT2 491-1C..., 3-54, 6-29
6GT2 491-1CH20, 3-58, 6-25, 6-47
6GT2 491-1CH50, 3-58, 6-25, 6-47
6GT2 491-1CN20, 3-58, 6-25, 6-47
6GT2 491-1DH50, 3-55, 3-58
6GT2 491-1HH50, 3-57, 3-58, 6-55, 6-56, 7-5
6GT2 494-0AA00, 5-11, 6-54, 6-55, 6-56, 7-5
6GT2 499-1BC00, 5-11
6GT2 690-0AB00, 5-9
6GT2 691-0BH50, 3-55, 3-58
6GT2 691-0BN20, 3-55, 3-58
A
Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting,
5-14, 5-20, 6-60, 6-89
Index-2 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Amount of data, Transmitted based on MDS
speed, 3-14
ASM 400
Address settings, 6-9
Function block FB 250, 6-7
Layout and function, 6-4
Ordering data, 6-5
Plug connectors and their assignment, 6-8
Settings on the channel module, 6-10
SIMATIC adapter capsule, 6-11
SIMATIC S5 Configuration, 6-11
Switches and plug-in jumpers, 6-9
Technical data, 6-6
ASM 410
Configuration in ET 100U/ET 200U, 6-19
Layout and function, 6-15
Ordering data, 6-16
Setting the operating mode, 6-21
Slots in PLC, 6-18
Technical data, 6-17
Wiring of one or two SLGs, 6-23
ASM 450
Dimensions, 6-31
Layout and function, 6-24
Ordering data, 6-25
Pin allocation, 6-32
PROFIBUS address and terminating resist-
ance, 6-34
PROFIBUS configuration, 6-28
SLG connection technique, 6-28
Technical data, 6-26
ASM 452
Dimensions, 6-31
Layout and function, 6-24
Ordering data, 6-25
Pin allocation, 6-32
PROFIBUS address and terminating resist-
ance, 6-34
PROFIBUS configuration, 6-28
SLG connection technique, 6-28
Technical data, 6-26
ASM 470
Installation of the software, 6-44
Layout and function, 6-35
Ordering data, 6-37
Technical data, 6-38
Wiring to the SLG, 6-43
ASM 473
Configuration, 6-49
Dimensions, 6-53
Hardware configuration, 6-51
Layout and function, 6-46
Ordering data, 6-47
Pin assignment, 6-52
SLG connection, 6-51
Technical data, 6-47
ASM 475
Layout and function, 6-36
Installation of the software, 6-44
Ordering data, 6-37
Technical data, 6-38
Wiring to the SLG, 6-43
ASM 824
Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting,
6-60
Dimensions, 6-60
Layout and function, 6-54
Ordering data, 6-55
Pin allocations and switches, 6-58
Technical data, 6-57
ASM 850
Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting,
6-60
Dimensions, 6-60
Layout and function, 6-54
Ordering data, 6-55
Pin allocations and switches, 6-58
Technical data, 6-57
ASM 854
Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting,
6-60
Dimensions, 6-60
Layout and function, 6-55
Ordering data, 6-55
Pin allocations and switches, 6-58
Technical data, 6-57
C
C library
MFWAPI, 7-4
MOBY API, 7-4
Cable configuration, 3-48
Index
Index-3
MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
Cables, Shielding, 3-42
Chemical resistance of the mobile data memo-
ries, 3-27
Communication
Between ASM and user program, 3-8
Between ASM, SLG/SLA and MDS F4xx,
3-7
Concept of shielding, 3-46
Connection cables, 3-53
D
Data structure of the MOBY F data memory
MDS F1xx, 6-66
MDS F4xx, 6-62
Documentation
Operator control guides, A-1
Technical descriptions, A-1
E
EMC basic rules, 3-44
EMC guidelines, 3-29
Avoiding interference sources, 3-39
FFT command, 3-34
Equipotential bonding, 3-40
F
FFT command, 3-34
Field data, 3-11, 6-67
L
LEDs for MOBY, 6-52
LEDs for PROFIBUS DP, 6-52
M
MDS F124
Dimensions, 4-5
Field data, 4-5
Metal-free space, 4-6
Ordering data, 4-4
Technical data, 4-4
MDS F125
Dimensions, 4-8
Field data, 4-8
Metal-free space, 4-9
Ordering data, 4-7
Technical data, 4-7
MDS F160
Dimension, 4-11
Field data, 4-11
Metal-free space, 4-12
Ordering data, 4-10
Technical data, 4-10
MDS F415
Dimensions, 4-15
Field data, 4-14
Memory organization, 4-14
Metal-free space, 4-15
Ordering data, 4-13
Technical data, 4-13
Metal-free space, 3-16
Flush mounting of antenna in metal, 3-17
Flush mounting of the SLG 82 in metal, 3-18
Mounting of antenna on metal, 3-17
MFWAPI, 7-4
MOBY API, 7-4
MOBY Hand-Held Terminal STG F
Hardware, 7-10
Layout and function, 7-8
Ordering data, 7-11
System prerequisites, 7-9
Technical data, 7-11
MOBY wide range power pack
Dimensions, 7-7
Ordering data, 7-5
Plug connector allocation of 24 V output,
7-6
Technical data, 7-5
Mounting clamp, 5-25
P
Plug connector allocations, 3-49
Index
Index-4 MOBY F Configuration, Installation and Service Manual
( ) J31069-D0113-U001-A5-7618
S
SIM 80 ANT F5
Definition of distance D, 6-80
Dimensions, 6-81
Field data, 6-77
Layout and function, 6-61
Metal-free space, 6-79
Ordering data, 6-75
Technical data, 6-76
Transmission window, 6-79
SIM 82
Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting,
6-89
Definition of distance D, 6-86
Dimensions, 6-88
Field data, 6-84
Layout and function, 6-61
Metal-free space, 6-85
Ordering data, 6-82
Pin allocations and switches, 6-86
Technical data, 6-82
Transmission window, 6-84
SLA 81
Definition of distance D, 5-24
Dimensions, 5-24
Field data, 5-22
Metal-free space, 5-23
Mounting clamp, 5-25
Ordering data, 5-21
Technical data, 5-21
Transmission window, 5-23
SLA 82
Definition of the distance D, 5-29
Dimensions, 5-29
Field data, 5-27
Metal-free space, 5-28
Ordering data, 5-26
Technical data, 5-26
Transmission window, 5-28
SLG 80 ANT F5
Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting,
5-20
Definition of distance D, 5-7
Dimensions, 5-8
Field data, 5-5
Metal-free space, 5-6
Ordering data, 5-3
Technical data, 5-3
Transmission window, 5-6
SLG 82
Definition of distance D, 5-18
Dimensions, 5-19
Field data, 5-17
Metal-free space, 5-17
Ordering data, 5-15
Pin allocations and switches, 5-18
Technical data, 5-15
Transmission window, 5-17
SLG 82 basic device
Adapter floor plate for top hat rail mounting,
5-14
Dimensions, 5-14
Ordering data, 5-11
Pin allocations and switches, 5-13
Technical data, 5-12
Software MOBY, 7-2
Ordering data, 7-4
Spacer kit for MOBY F ANT F5, 5-9
Stecker, Bestelldaten, 3-51, 3-52
T
Transmission window, 3-3
Effects of metal, 3-19
Reduction of metallic effects, 3-24
Transmit period of the MDS, 3-6
Index